1
New Product
Digital Temperature Controller
E5@C/E5@C-T
E5
@
C Series That Pursues Greater Visibility with Large White PV Display.
Introducing Models with Push-In Plus Terminal Blocks for Unified Panel
Solutions. Reduce Required Wiring Work. A Wide Lineup of Models to
Meet a Wide Range of User Needs.
Programmable Digital Temperature Controllers: E5@C-T Series
Digital Temperature Controllers: E5@C Series
48 × 24 mm
48 × 48 mm
48 × 96 mm
96 × 96 mm
E5GC
E5CC
E5CC-B
E5CC-U
E5EC
E5EC-B
E5AC
E5DC
E5DC-B
E5CC-T
E5EC-T
E5AC-T
DIN 22.5-mm-wide
Controllers That
Mount to
DIN Track
48 × 48 mm
48 × 96 mm
96 × 96 mm
Models with Screw Terminal Blocks
Models with
Push-In Plus Terminal Blocks
Plug-in Models
Models with Screw Terminal Blocks/
Models with Screwless Clamp
Terminal Blocks
Models with Screw Terminal Blocks
Models with Screw Terminal Blocks
Models with Screw Terminal Blocks
Models with Screw Terminal Blocks
Models with Screw Terminal Blocks
Models with Screw Terminal Blocks
Models with
Push-In Plus Terminal Blocks
Models with
Push-In Plus Terminal Blocks
page 18
page 40
page 40
page 58
page 78
page 96
page 96
page 2
page 40
page 18
page 18
page 58
2
Digital Temperature Controller
E5GC (48 × 24 mm)
Easy Operation and High Performance of
the E5@C Series in a Compact 48 × 24-
mm Body
• A compact body of 48 × 24 × 90 mm (W × H × D) that is ideal for
small equipment, laboratory instruments, and others.
• White PV display with a height of 10.5 mm for high visibility even
with the compact body.
• Removable terminal block to simplify maintenance. Select from
screw terminal blocks or screwless clamp terminal blocks for the
wiring method.
• High-speed sampling at 50 ms.
• Easy connections to a PLC with programless communications.
• Set up the Controller without wiring the power supply by
connecting to the computer with a Communications Conversion
Cable (sold separately). Setup is easy with the CX-Thermo (sold
separately).
Main I/O Functions
*
48 × 24 mm
Models with Screw
Terminal Blocks
E5GC-@6
Refer to Safety Precautions on 122.
Refer to your OMRON website for the most recent
information on applicable safety standards.
48 × 24 mm
Models with Screwless
Clamp Terminal Blocks
E5GC-@C
*CSAconformance
evaluationbyUL.
Event Inputs
• None
• 1
Control Output 1
• Relay output
•
Voltage output (for driving SSR)
• Linear current output
Auxiliary Outputs
• None
• 1
Dual displays: PV/SV
4-digit displays
• PF (shift) Key
• Temperature status display
• Simple programming
• Changed parameter display
• Display brightness setting
Serial Communications
• None
• RS-485
E5GC
• Independent heating and
cooling PID control
• 2
• 2
• Work Bit Message
•
Simple transfer output (only on
models with liner current outputs)
Sensor Input
Indication Accuracy
• Thermocouple input:
±0.3% of PV
• Pt input: ±0.2% of PV
• Analog input: ±0.2% of FS
Sampling Period
• 50 ms
Universal input
• Thermocouple
• Pt
• Analog current/voltage
This datasheet is provided as a guideline for selecting products.
Be sure to refer to the following manuals for application precautions and other information required for operation before attempting
to use the product.
E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers User’s Manual (Cat. No. H174)
E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers Communications Manual (Cat. No. H175)
E5GC
3
Model Number Legend and Standard Models
Model Number Legend
E5GC-@@ @@@M-@@@ (Example: E5GC-RX1A6M-015)
−− −−− −
−−−
ABCDEF
*1. The control output can be used as a simple transfer output.
*2. Only option 000 can be selected if an auxiliary output is zero.
*3. Option 016 and 023 can be selected only if two auxiliary outputs are selected.
*4. Option with HB and HS alarms (023) cannot be selected if a linear current output is selected for the control output.
*5. Option 024 can be selected only if one auxiliary output is selected.
*6. The specifications are different for Temperature Controllers with Push-In Plus terminal blocks. Refer to Precautions when Wiring on page 131.
Heating and Cooling Control
Using Heating and Cooling Control
A Control Output Assignment
An auxiliary output is used as the cooling control output.
B Control
If PID control is used, you can set PID control separately for heating and cooling.
This allows you to handle control systems with different heating and cooling response characteristics.
Model
A B C D E F
Meaning
Control
outputs 1
and 2
No. of
auxiliary
outputs
Power
supply
voltage
Terminal
type
Input
type Options
E5GC 48 × 24 mm
Control output 1 Control output 2
RX Relay output None
QX Voltage output
(for driving SSR) None
*1CX Linear current output None
*20 None
11
22
A100 to 240 VAC
D24 VAC/DC
6Screw terminal blocks (with cover)
CScrewless clamp terminal blocks *6
MUniversal input
HB alarm and HS alarm Communications Event inputs
000 --- --- ---
015 --- RS-485 ---
*3016 --- --- 1
*3, *4023 1 --- ---
*5024 --- --- 2
E5GC
4
Optional Products (Order Separately)
USB-Serial Conversion Cable
Communications Conversion Cable
Note: Always use this product together with the E58-CIFQ2.
This Cable is used to connect to the bottom-panel Setup Tool
port.
Current Transformers (CTs)
*Lead wires are included with these CTs. If UL certification is required, use
these CTs.
Mounting Adapter
Note: This Mounting Adapter is provided with the Digital Temperature
Controller.
Waterproof Packing
Note: This Waterproof Packing is provided with the Digital
Temperature Controller.
Draw-out Jig
CX-Thermo Support Software
Note: CX-Thermo version 4.62 or higher is required for the E5GC.
For the system requirements for the CX-Thermo, refer to
information on the EST2-2C-MV4 on the OMRON website
(www.ia.omron.com).
Terminal Covers (for E5GC-@6)
Note: This Terminal Covers is provided with the Digital Temperature
Controller.
Model
E58-CIFQ2
Model
E58-CIFQ2-E
Hole diameter Model
5.8 mm E54-CT1
5.8 mm E54-CT1L*
12.0 mm E54-CT3
12.0 mm E54-CT3L*
Model
Y92F-53 (2pcs)
Model
Y92S-P12
Model
Y92F-55
Model
EST2-2C-MV4
Model
E53-COV27
E5GC
5
Specifications
Ratings
*There are up to four event inputs.
Power supply voltage A in model number: 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
D in model number: 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz; 24 VDC
Operating voltage range 85 to 110% of rated supply voltage
Power consumption 5.9 VA max. at 100 to 240 VAC, and 3.2 VA max. at 24 VAC or 1.8 W max. at 24 VDC
Sensor input
Temperature input
Thermocouple: K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B, C/W, or PL II
Platinum resistance thermometer: Pt100 or JPt100
Infrared temperature sensor (ES1B): 10 to 70°C, 60 to 120°C, 115 to 165°C, or 140 to 260°C
Analog input
Current input: 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA
Voltage input: 1 to 5 V, 0 to 5 V, or 0 to 10 V
Input impedance Current input: 150 Ω max., Voltage input: 1 MΩ min.
(Use a 1:1 connection when connecting the ES2-HB-N/THB-N.)
Control method ON/OFF control or 2-PID control (with auto-tuning)
Control
output
Relay output SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 2 A (resistive load), electrical life: 100,000 operations, minimum applicable load: 5
V, 10 mA (reference value)
Voltage output
(for driving SSR) Output voltage 12 VDC ±20% (PNP), max. Load current: 21 mA, with short-circuit protection circuit
Linear current output 4 to 20 mA DC/0 to 20 mA DC, load: 500 Ω max., resolution: Approx. 10,000
Auxiliary
output
Number of outputs 1 or 2 (depends on model)
Output specifications SPST-NO relay outputs, 250 VAC, 2 A (resistive load),
Electrical life: 100,000 operations, Minimum applicable load: 10 mA at 5 V (reference value)
Event
input
Number of inputs 1 or 2 (depends on model)
External contact input
specifications
Contact input ON: 1 kΩ max., OFF: 100 kΩ min.
Non-contact input ON: Residual voltage 1.5 V max.; OFF: Leakage current 0.1 mA max.
Current flow: approx. 7 mA per contact
Setting method Digital setting using front panel keys
Indication method 11-segment digital displays and individual indicators
Character height: PV: 10.5 mm, SV: 5.0 mm
Multi SP Up to eight set points (SP0 to SP7) can be saved and selected using the event inputs, key operations, or
serial communications. *
Bank switching None
Other functions
Manual output, heating/cooling control, loop burnout alarm, SP ramp, other alarm functions, heater
burnout (HB) alarm (including SSR failure (HS) alarm), 40% AT, 100% AT, MV limiter, input digital filter,
self tuning, robust tuning, PV input shift, run/stop, protection functions, extraction of square root, MV
change rate limit, logic operations, temperature status display, simple programming, moving average of
input value, display brightness setting, simple transfer output, and work bit message
Ambient operating temperature −10 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing), For 3-year warranty: −10 to 50°C with standard mounting (with
no condensation or icing)
Ambient operating humidity 25 to 85%
Storage temperature −25 to 65°C (with no condensation or icing)
Altitude 2,000 m max.
Recommended fuse T2A, 250 VAC, time-lag, low-breaking capacity
Installation environment Overvoltage category II, Pollution Degree 2 (EN/IEC/UL 61010-1)
E5GC
6
Input Ranges
Thermocouple/Platinum Resistance Thermometer (Universal inputs)
Shaded settings are the default settings.
The applicable standards for the input types are as follows:
K, J, T, E, N, R, S, B: JIS C 1602-2015, IEC 60584-1 JPt100: JIS C 1604-1989, JIS C 1606-1989
L: Fe-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985 Pt100: JIS C 1604-1997, IEC 60751
U: Cu-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985 PL II: According to Platinel II electromotive force charts from BASF (previously Engelhard)
C/W: W5Re/W26Re, JIS C 1602-2015, ASTM E988-1990
Analog input
Sensor
type
Platinum resistance
thermometer Thermocouple Infrared temperature
sensor
Sensor
specification
Pt100 JPt100 K J T E L U N R S B
C/W
PLII 10 to
70°C
60 to
120°C
115 to
165°C
140 to
260°C
2300
1800
1700
1600
1500
1400
1300
1200
1100
1000
900
800
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
-100
-200
2300
1800
1700 1700
1300 1300 1300
850 850 850
600
500.0 500.0 500.0
400.0 400 400.0 400 400.0
260
120 165
100.0 100.0 90
100
0.0 0.0 00 0 0 0000
-20.0 -100 -20.0 -100
-200 -199.9 -199.9 -200 -200 -199.9 -200 -200 -199.9 -200
Set value 012345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Input type Current Voltage
Input specification
4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA
1 to 5 V 0 to 5 V 0 to 10 V
Setting range
Usable in the following ranges by scaling:
-1999 to 9999, -199.9 to 999.9,
-19.99 to 99.99 or -1.999 to 9.999
Set value 25 26 27 28 29
Temperature range (°C)
E5GC
7
Alarm Types
Each alarm can be independently set to one of the following 17 alarm types. The default is 2: Upper limit. (See note.)
Auxiliary outputs are allocated to alarms. ON delays and OFF delays (0 to 999 s) can also be specified.
Note:
In the default settings for models with HB or HS alarms, alarm 1 is set to a heater alarm (HA) and the Alarm Type 1 parameter is not displayed.
To use alarm 1, set the output assignment to alarm 1.
Set
value
Alarm type
Alarm output operation
Description of function
When alarm value X
is positive
When alarm value X
is negative
0 Alarm function OFF Output OFF No alarm
1 Upper- and lower-limit *1*2
Set the upward deviation in the set point for the alarm upper
limit (H) and the lower deviation in the set point for the alarm
lower limit (L). The alarm is ON when the PV is outside this
deviation range.
2
(default) Upper-limit
Set the upward deviation in the set point by setting the alarm
value (X). The alarm is ON when the PV is higher than the
SP by the deviation or more.
3 Lower-limit
Set the downward deviation in the set point by setting the
alarm value (X). The alarm is ON when the PV is lower than
the SP by the deviation or more.
4Upper- and lower-limit
range
*
1*3
Set the upward deviation in the set point for the alarm upper
limit (H) and the lower deviation in the set point for the alarm
lower limit (L). The alarm is ON when the PV is inside this
deviation range.
5
Upper- and lower-limit with
standby sequence
*
1
*4A standby sequence is added to the upper- and lower-limit
alarm (1). *6
6Upper-limit with standby
sequence A standby sequence is added to the upper-limit alarm (2). *6
7Lower-limit with standby
sequence A standby sequence is added to the lower-limit alarm (3). *6
8Absolute-value upper-
limit
The alarm will turn ON if the process value is larger than the
alarm value (X) regardless of the set point.
9 Absolute-value lower-limit The alarm will turn ON if the process value is smaller than the
alarm value (X) regardless of the set point.
10
Absolute-value upper-
limit with standby
sequence
A standby sequence is added to the absolute-value upper-
limit alarm (8). *6
11 Absolute-value lower-limit
with standby sequence
A standby sequence is added to the absolute-value lower-
limit alarm (9). *6
12
LBA (alarm 1 type only)
-*7
13 PV change rate alarm - *8
14 SP absolute-value
upper-limit alarm
This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the set point (SP)
is higher than the alarm value (X).
15 SP absolute-value
lower-limit alarm
This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the set point (SP)
is lower than the alarm value (X).
16 MV absolute-value
upper-limit alarm *9
Standard Control Standard Control
This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the manipulated
variable (MV) is higher than the alarm value (X).
Heating/Cooling
Control (Heating MV) Heating/Cooling
Control (Heating MV)
Always ON
17 MV absolute-value
lower-limit alarm *9
Standard Control Standard Control
This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the manipulated
variable (MV) is lower than the alarm value (X).
Heating/Cooling
Control (Cooling MV) Heating/Cooling
Control (Cooling MV)
Always ON
ON
OFF PV
SP
LH
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
SP
LH
ON
OFF PV
SP
LH
ON
OFF PV
*
5
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF SP
0
X
ON
OFF SP
0
X
ON
OFF SP
0
X
ON
OFF SP
0
X
ON
OFF MV
0
X
ON
OFF MV
0
X
ON
OFF MV
0
X
ON
OFF MV
0
X
ON
OFF MV
0
X
ON
OFF MV
E5GC
8
*1. With set values 1, 4, and 5, the upper- and lower-limit values can
be set independently for each alarm type, and are expressed as
“L” and “H.”
*2. Set value: 1, Upper- and lower-limit alarm
*3. Set value: 4, Upper- and lower-limit range
*4. Set value: 5, Upper- and lower-limit with standby sequence
For Upper- and Lower-Limit Alarm Described Above at *2
• In cases 1 and 2 above, the alarm is always OFF if the upper-
and lower-limit hysteresis overlaps.
• In case 3, the alarm is always OFF.
*5. Set value: 5, Upper- and lower-limit alarm with standby sequence
The alarm is always OFF if upper- and lower-limit hysteresis
overlaps.
*6. Refer to the E5
@
C Digital Temperature Controllers User’s Manual
(Cat. No. H174) for information on the operation of the standby
sequence.
*7. Refer to the E5
@
C Digital Temperature Controllers User’s Manual
(Cat. No. H174) for information on the LBA.
*8. Refer to the E5
@
C Digital Temperature Controllers User’s Manual
(Cat. No. H174) for information on the PV change rate alarm.
*9. When heating/cooling control is performed, the MV absolute-
value upper-limit alarm functions only for the heating operation
and the MV absolute-value lower-limit alarm functions only for the
cooling operation.
LHSP LHSP LHSP
LHSP
LHSP
Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 (Always OFF)
H<0, L>0
|H| < |L|
H>0, L<0
|H| > |L|
H<0, L<0
H<0, L>0
|H| ≥ |L|
H>0, L<0
|H| ≤ |L|
LHSP LHSP LHSP
L
L
HSP
HSP
Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 (Always ON)
H<0, L<0
H<0, L>0
|H| ≥ |L|
H>0, L<0
|H| ≤ |L|
H<0, L>0
|H| < |L|
H>0, L<0
|H| > |L|
E5GC
9
Characteristics
*1. The indication accuracy of K thermocouples in the −200 to 1,300°C range, T and N thermocouples at a temperature of −100°C max., and U
and L thermocouples at any temperature is ±2°C ±1 digit max. The indication accuracy of B thermocouples at a temperature of 400°C max. is
not specified. The indication accuracy of B thermocouples at a temperature of 400 to 800°C is ±3°C max.
The indication accuracy of R and S thermocouples at a temperature of 200°C max. is ±3°C ±1 digit max. The indication accuracy of C/W
thermocouples is (±0.3% of PV or ±3°C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max.
The indication accuracy of PLII thermocouples is (±0.3% of PV or ±2°C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max.
*2. However, the precision between 0 and 4 mA for a 0 to 20 mA output is ±1% FS max.
*3. Ambient temperature: −10°C to 23°C to 55°C, Voltage range: −15% to 10% of rated voltage
*4. K thermocouple at −100°C max.: ±10°C max.
*5. The unit is determined by the setting of the Integral/Derivative Time Unit parameter.
*6. External serial communications (RS-485) and USB-Serial Conversion Cable communications can be used at the same time.
*7. Refer to your OMRON website for the most recent information on applicable models.
*8. Industrial electromagnetic environment (EN/IEC 61326-1 Table 2)
Indication accuracy
(at the temperature of 23°C)
Thermocouple: (±0.3 % of indication value or ±1°C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max.*1
Platinum resistance thermometer: (±0.2 % of indication value or ±0.8°C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max.
Analog input:
±
0.2% FS
±
1 digit max.
CT input: ±5% FS ±1 digit max.
Simple transfer output accuracy ±0.3% FS max.*2
Influence of temperature *3
Thermocouple input (R, S, B, C/W, PL II): (
±
1% of indication value or
±
10
°
C, whichever is greater)
±
1 digit max.
Other thermocouple input: (±1% of indication value or ±4°C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max. *4
Platinum resistance thermometer: (±1% of indication value or ±2°C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max.
Analog input: ±1% FS ±1 digit max.
CT input: ±5% FS ±1 digit max.
Influence of voltage *3
Influence of EMS.
(at EN 61326-1)
Input sampling period 50 ms
Hysteresis Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9°C or °F (in units of 0.1°C or °F)
Analog input: 0.01% to 99.99% FS (in units of 0.01% FS)
Proportional band (P) Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9°C or °F (in units of 0.1°C or °F)
Analog input: 0.1% to 999.9% FS (in units of 0.1% FS)
Integral time (I) 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *5
Derivative time (D) 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *5
Proportional band (P) for cooling Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9°C or °F (in units of 0.1°C or °F)
Analog input: 0.1% to 999.9% FS (in units of 0.1% FS)
Integral time (I) for cooling 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *5
Derivative time (D) for cooling 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *5
Control period 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1 to 99 s (in units of 1 s)
Manual reset value 0.0% to 100.0% (in units of 0.1%)
Alarm setting range −1,999 to 9,999 (decimal point position depends on input type)
Influence of signal source
resistance Thermocouple: 0.1°C/Ω max. (100 Ω max.), Platinum resistance thermometer: 0.1°C/Ω max. (10 Ω max.)
Insulation resistance 20 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC)
Dielectric strength 100 to 240 VAC: 3,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of different charge
24 VAC/DC: 2,300 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of different charge
Vibration Malfunction 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s2 for 10 min each in X, Y and Z directions
Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s2 for 2 hr each in X, Y, and Z directions
Shock Malfunction 100 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions
Resistance 300 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions
Weight Controller: Approx. 80 g, Mounting Adapter: Approx. 4 g × 2
Degree of protection Front panel: IP66, Rear case: IP20, Terminals: IP00
Memory protection Non-volatile memory (number of writes: 1,000,000 times)
Setup Tool CX-Thermo version 4.62 or higher
Setup Tool port
E5GC side panel: An E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is used to connect a USB port on the
computer. *6
E5GC bottom panel: An E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable and E58-CIFQ2-E Conversion Cable
are used together to connect a USB port on the computer. *6
Standards Approved standards cULus: UL 61010-1/CSA C22.2 No.61010-1, Korean wireless regulations (Radio law: KC Mark) (Some
models only.) *7, EAC
Conformed standards EN 61010-1 (IEC 61010-1), RCM
EMC
EMI: EN61326-1 *8
Radiated Interference Electromagnetic Field Strength: EN55011 Group 1, class A
Noise Terminal Voltage: EN55011 Group 1, class A
EMS: EN61326-1 *8
ESD Immunity: EN61000-4-2
Electromagnetic Field Immunity: EN61000-4-3
Burst Noise Immunity: EN61000-4-4
Conducted Disturbance Immunity: EN61000-4-6
Surge Immunity: EN61000-4-5
Voltage Dip/Interrupting Immunity: EN61000-4-11
E5GC
10
USB-Serial Conversion Cable
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and or other countries.
*1. CX-Thermo version 4.65 or higher runs on Windows 10.
*2. Use a high-power port for the USB port.
Note:
A driver must be installed on the computer. Refer to the
Instruction
Manual
included with the Cable for the installation procedure.
Communications Specifications
*The baud rate, data bit length, stop bit length, and vertical parity can
be individually set using the Communications Setting Level.
Communications Functions
MELSEC is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
KEYENCE is a registered trademark of Keyence Corporation.
*Both the programless communications and the component
communications support the copying.
Current Transformer (Order Separately)
Ratings
Heater Burnout Alarms and SSR Failure
Alarms
*1. For heater burnout alarms, the heater current will be measured
when the control output is ON, and the output will turn ON if the
heater current is lower than the set value (i.e., heater burnout
detection current value).
*2. For SSR failure alarms, the heater current will be measured when
the control output is OFF, and the output will turn ON if the heater
current is higher than the set value (i.e., SSR failure detection
current value).
*3. The value is 30 ms for a control period of 0.1 s or 0.2 s.
*4. The value is 35 ms for a control period of 0.1 s or 0.2 s.
Electrical Life Expectancy Curve for
Control Output Relay (Reference Values)
Applicable OS Windows XP/Vista/7/8/10 *1
Applicable software CX-Thermo version 4.62 or higher
Applicable models
E5
@
C-T Series, E5
@
C Series, and E5CB Series
USB interface standard
Conforms to USB Specification 2.0
DTE speed 38,400 bps
Connector
specifications
Computer: USB (Type A plug)
Digital Temperature Controller: Special serial
connector
Power supply
Bus power (Supplied from the USB host controller)
*
2
Power supply voltage
5 VDC
Current
consumption 450 mA max.
Output voltage
4.7
±
0.2 VDC (Supplied from USB-Serial Conversion
Cable to the Digital Temperature Controller.)
Output current
250 mA max. (Supplied from USB-Serial Conversion
Cable to the Digital Temperature Controller.)
Ambient operating
temperature 0 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing)
Ambient operating
humidity 10% to 80%
Storage temperature
−20 to 60°C (with no condensation or icing)
Storage humidity 10% to 80%
Altitude 2,000 m max.
Weight Approx. 120 g
Transmission line
connection method RS-485: Multidrop
Communications RS-485 (two-wire, half duplex)
Synchronization method Start-stop synchronization
Protocol CompoWay/F, or Modbus
Baud rate *9,600, 19,200, 38,400, or 57,600 bps
Transmission code ASCII
Data bit length *7 or 8 bits
Stop bit length *1 or 2 bits
Error detection
Vertical parity (none, even, odd)
Block check character (BCC)
with CompoWay/F or
CRC-16 with Modbus
Flow control None
Interface RS-485
Retry function None
Communications buffer 217 bytes
Communications
response wait time
0 to 99 ms
Default: 20 ms
Programless
communica-
tions
You can use the memory in the PLC to read and write
E5@C parameters, start and stop operation, etc.
The E5
@
C automatically performs communications with
PLCs. No communications programming is required.
Number of connected Digital Temperature
Controllers: 32 max. (Up to 16 for the FX Series)
Applicable PLCs
OMRON PLCs CS Series, CJ Series, CP
Series, NJ Series, or NX1P
Mitsubishi Electric PLCs
MELSEC Q Series, L Series,
FX3 Series, or iQ-R Series
KEYENCE PLCs KEYENCE KV Series
Component
Communi-
cations
When Digital Temperature Controllers are connected,
set points and RUN/STOP commands can be sent
from the Digital Temperature Controller that is set as
the master to the Digital Temperature Controllers that
are set as slaves.
Slope and offsets can be set for the set point.
Number of connected Digital Temperature
Controllers: 32 max. (including master)
Copying *
When Digital Temperature Controllers are connected,
the parameters can be copied from the Digital
Temperature Controller that is set as the master to the
Digital Temperature Controllers that are set as slaves.
E54-CT1
E54-CT3
E54-CT1L
E54-CT3L
Dielectric strength
1,000 VAC for 1 min 1,500 VAC for 1 min
Vibration resistance
50 Hz, 98 m/s2
Weight
E54-CT1: Approx. 11.5 g
E54-CT3: Approx. 50 g
E54-CT1L: Approx. 14 g
E54-CT3L: Approx. 57 g
Accessories
E54-CT3 Only
Armatures (2)
Plugs (2)
None
CT input (for heater
current detection)
Models with detection for single-phase
heaters: One input
Maximum heater current 50 A AC
Input current
indication accuracy ±5% FS ±1 digit max.
Heater burnout alarm
setting range *1
0.1 to 49.9 A (in units of 0.1 A)
Minimum detection ON time: 100 ms *3
SSR failure alarm setting
range *2
0.1 to 49.9 A (in units of 0.1 A)
Minimum detection OFF time: 100 ms
*4
Switching current (A)
Life (× 104 operations)
500
300
200
100
50
30
20
10
5
3
2
1
0.1 0.2 0.50.3 1 2 3 5 10
E5GC
250 VAC, 30 VDC
(resistive load)
cosφ = 1
E5GC
11
External Connections
E5GC
Note: 1. The application of the terminals depends on the model.
2. Do not wire the terminals that are shown with a gray background.
3. When complying with EMC standards, the cable that connects the sensor must be 30 m or less.
If the cable length exceeds 30 m, compliance with EMC standards will not be possible.
4. Connect M3 crimped terminals.
5. Due to UL Listing requirements, use the E54-CT1L or E54-CT3L Current Transformer with the factory wiring (internal wiring).
Use a UL category XOBA or XOBA7 current transformer that is UL Listed for field wiring (external wiring) and not the factory wiring
(internal wiring).
Isolation/Insulation Block Diagrams
Note: Auxiliary outputs 1 to 2 are not insulated.
E5GC-@@@@@M-@@@
(1) (2)(3)(4)(5) (6)
Linear current output
0 to 20 mA DC
4 to 20 mA DC
Load: 500 Ω max.
Voltage output (for driving SSR)
12 VDC, 21 mA
Relay output
250 VAC, 2 A
(resistive load)
250 VAC, 2 A
(resistive load)
Relay outputs
Control Outputs
Auxiliary outputs 1, 2
↑
Terminal type
The E5GC is set for a K-type thermocouple (input type = 5) by
default. An input error (s.err) wil occur if the input type setting
does not agree with the temperature sensor. Check the input type.
CT
789
EV2
EV1
024
Event inputs 1 and 2
789
015
Communications
(RS-485)
RS-485
B(+) A(−)
789
EV1
016
Event input 1
789
023
CT input
12
100 to 240 VAC
12
24 VAC/DC
(no polarity)
34
RX
Relay output
RQ C
34
QX
Voltage output (for driving SSR)
34
CX
Linear current output
10 11 12
V
V
+
+
−
+−
+− +−
−
10 11 12
mA
I
10 11 12
TC
10 11 12
Pt
B
AB
789101112
123456
(6) Options
(3) Input Power Supply
(1) Control Outputs
9
56
Auxiliary
output 1
Auxiliary
output 2
(2) Auxiliary Outputs
56
Auxiliary
output 1
Auxiliary
output 1
Auxiliary outputs 1, 2
(5) Sensor (Temperature/Analog) Input
(−)
(−)
Use no-voltage inputs for the event inputs.
The polarity for non-contact inputs is given in parentheses.
Sensor input and CT input
Communications and event inputs
Voltage output (for driving SSR) and linear current output
Relay output
Auxiliary outputs 1 and 2
: Reinforced insulation
: Functional isolation
Power
supply
E5GC
12
Terminal Block Appearance
Wires:AWG24 to AWG18 (equal to a cross-sectional area of 0.21 to 0.82 mm2) braided or solid wires
Note: Refer to Precautions When Wiring E5GC (Controllers with Screwless Clamp Terminal Blocks) on page 132 for information on wiring
Controllers with screwless clamp terminal blocks.
Nomenclature
Controllers with Screw Terminal Blocks
• Terminal type: Forked or round crimped terminals
• Tightening torque for all terminals: 0.43 to 0.58 N·m
5.8 mm max.
5.8 mm max.
E5GC-@6
Controllers with Screw Terminal Blocks (M3 Screws)
0.8 to 1.4 mm
8 to 12 mm 8 to 12 mm
Controllers with Screwless Clamp Terminals Blocks
• Wire stripping length: 8 to 12 mm
• Ferrules: 8 to 12 mm
E5GC-@C
Controllers with Screwless Clamp Terminal Blocks
Left-panel
Setup Tool
port
Left Side View of the E5GC
Bottom View of E5GC
Bottom-panel Setup
Tool port
Front panel
Use the U D Keys to set the parameter.
PV or specified parameter
SP or specified parameter value
Use the
M
Key to change
to another parameter.
No.2 display
Use
S
Key to change the
digit (default setting).
No. 1 display
Operation indicators
Temperature unit
Press O Key once to go to Adjustment Level.
Press O Key for at least 3 seconds
to go to the Initial Setting Level.
E5GC
E5GC
13
Dimensions (Unit: mm)
Controllers
L1
40 min
Mounted Separately Horizontally Group Mounted
+1.0
+0
L1=(48×n-2.5)
45
+0.6
0
22.2
+0.3
0
22.2
+0.3
0
n: Number of mounted Controllers (2 ≤ n ≤ 6)
Terminal Cover (Accessory, E53-COV27
(also available for ordering separately))
Mounting Adapter (Accessory, Y92F-53 (also available for ordering separately))
Waterproof Packing (Accessory, Y92S-P12 (also available for ordering separately))
2222
24
63.6
48 4
1
90
40.8
44.8
E5GC-@6
Controllers with Screw
Terminal Blocks
• Use two Mounting Adapters, either on the top and bottom or on the right and left.
• Setup Tool ports are provided as standard feature. Use these ports to connect a computer to the Digital Temperature Controller. The E58-
CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is required to connect to the port on the side panel. The E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable
and E58-CIFQ2-E Communications Conversion Cable are required to connect to the port on the bottom panel. (You cannot leave either
port connected constantly during operation.)
• To install the Temperature Controller, insert it into a square hole in a panel with a thickness of 1 to 8 mm, and then insert the enclosed
adapter so that it locks into the grooves on the top and bottom or on the left and right of the rear case.
• Tighten the two mounting screws on the top and bottom or on the right and left of the Mounting Adapters alternately little by little to main-
tain a balance, and tighten them to a torque of between 0.29 and 0.39 N·m.
• When two or more Temperature Controllers are mounted, make sure that the surrounding temperature does not exceed the allowable
operating temperature range given below.
Horizontal group mounting: −10 to 55°C
• Use Temperature Controllers with Screwless Clamp Terminal Blocks for vertical group mounting.
To mount the Temperature Controller so that it is waterproof,
insert the Waterproof Packing onto the Temperature Controller.
Group mounting does not allow waterproofing.
Mounting Adapter (Accessory, Y92F-53 (also available for ordering separately))
Waterproof Packing (Accessory, Y92S-P12 (also available for ordering separately))
22
22
24
63.6
48 493
40.8
44.8
1
L1
40 min
+1.0
+0
L2=(24×n-1.5)
45
+0.6
+0
45+0.6
0
22.2+0.3
0
22.2+0.3
0
Mounted Separately Horizontally Group Mounted Vertically Group Mounted
L2
+1.0
+0
L1=(48×n-2.5)
n: Number of mounted Controllers (2 ≤ n ≤ 6)
E5GC-@C
Controllers with Screwless
Clamp Terminal Blocks
• Use two Mounting Adapters, either on the top and bottom or on the right and left.
• Setup Tool ports are provided as standard feature. Use these ports to connect a computer to the Digital Temperature Controller. The E58-
CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is required to connect to the port on the side panel. The E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable
and E58-CIFQ2-E Communications Conversion Cable are required to connect to the port on the bottom panel. (You cannot leave either
port connected constantly during operation.)
• To install the Temperature Controller, insert it into a square hole in a panel with a thickness of 1 to 8 mm, and then insert the enclosed
adapter so that it locks into the grooves on the top and bottom or on the left and right of the rear case.
• Tighten the two mounting screws on the top and bottom or on the right and left of the Mounting Adapters alternately little by little to main-
tain a balance, and tighten them to a torque of between 0.29 and 0.39 N·m.
• When two or more Temperature Controllers are mounted, make sure that the surrounding temperature does not exceed the allowable
operating temperature range given below.
Horizontal group mounting: −10 to 55°C
Vertical group mounting of two Controllers: −10 to 45°C
Vertical group mounting of three or more Controllers: −10 to 40°C
• If you use vertical group mounting, you cannot draw out the interior body of the Controller.
To mount the Temperature Controller so
that it is waterproof, insert the Waterproof
Packing onto the Temperature Controller.
Group mounting does not allow waterproof-
ing.
E5GC
14
Accessories (Order Separately)
Current Transformers
(2110)
250 263 1510
USB connector
(type A plug) Serial connector
LED (SD)
LED (PWR)
LED (RD)
USB-Serial Conversion Cable
E58-CIFQ2
Connecting to the E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion CableConversion Cable
(1510) 250
(2110)
E58-CIFQ2 (Order separately) Conversion Cable
263 1510
Conversion Cable
E58-CIFQ2-E
Note: Always use this product together with the E58-CIFQ2.
5.8 dia.
Two, 3.5 dia.
30
21
15
25 2.5
40
10.5
2.8
7.5
5
10
Filler
(epoxy)
Case
E54-CT1 Thru-current (Io) vs. Output Voltage (Eo)
(Reference Values)
E54-CT1 or E54-CT1L
Maximum continuous heater current: 50 A (50/60 Hz)
Number of windings: 400±2
Winding resistance: 18±2 Ω
Thru-current (Io) A (r.m.s.)
1 10 100mA 1 10 100
1,000A
100V
Frequency: 50 Hz
Distortion
factor
10%
3%
1%
100Ω
RL=10Ω
∞
10
1
100mV
10
1
100μV
10
1kΩ
Output voltage (Eo) V (r.m.s.)
E54-CT1L
5.8 dia. Filler (epoxy)
Case (PBT)
Shrinkable tube
Two, 3.5 dia.
Cable (AWG18)
25 2.5
115±5
8
21
10.5
40
30
5
15
10
Mark (yellow)
(12)
E5GC
15
E54-CT3 Accessories
• Armature
12 dia.
2.36 dia.
Two, M3 (depth: 4)
40 × 40
30
9
30
8
Filler
(epoxy)
Case
(PBT)
15
40
Approx. 3 dia.
18
(22)
Approx. 6 dia.
Plug
Armature
Lead
E54-CT3
Connection Example
•Plug
Thru-current (Io) vs. Output Voltage (Eo)
(Reference Values)
E54-CT3 or E54-CT3L
Maximum continuous heater current: 120 A (50/60 Hz)
(Maximum continuous heater current for an OMRON
Digital Temperature Controller is 50 A.)
Number of windings: 400±2
Winding resistance: 8±0.8 Ω
Thru-current (Io) A (r.m.s.)
1 10 100mA 1 10 100
1,000A
100V
Frequency: 50 Hz
Distortion
factor
10%
3%
1%
1kΩ
100Ω
50Ω
RL=10Ω
500Ω
∞
10
1
100mV
10
1
100μV
10
Output voltage (Eo) V (r.m.s.)
Filler (epoxy)
Case (PBT)
Cable (AWG18)
12.0
dia.
30
40
8
40 15
100±5
8
Two, M3
(depth: 4)
30
E54-CT3L
E5GC
16
Mounting Adapter
Y92F-53 (Two provided.)
Waterproof Packing
Y92S-P12
Draw-out Jig
Y92F-55
Terminal Covers
E53-COV27
12
34.7
11.8 9.4
One pair is provided with the Temperature
Controller. Order the Mounting Adapter
separately if it becomes lost or damaged.
The Waterproof Packing is provided with the Temperature Controller.
Order the Waterproof Packing separately if it becomes lost or damaged.
The Waterproof Packing can be used to achieve an IP66 degree of protection.
(Deterioration, shrinking, or hardening of the waterproof packing may occur depending on the operating
environment. Therefore, periodic replacement is recommended to ensure the level of waterproofing
specified in IP66. The time for periodic replacement depends on the operating environment.
Be sure to confirm this point at your site. Consider three years a rough standard.)
28.7
15 30.5
32.9
1.4
23
27.4
22
20
Use this Draw-out Jig to remove the interior
body of the Digital Temperature Controller
from the case to perform maintenance
without removing the terminal wiring.
44.7
21.9
2.5
1.45
(E53-COV27)
Terminal Covers
The Terminal Covers is provided with the
Digital Temperature Controller. Order the
Terminal Covers separately if it becomes
lost or damaged.
17
MEMO
18
Digital Temperature Controller
E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U
(48 × 48 mm)
Large White PV Display That’s Easier to Read.
Easy to Use, from Model Selection to
Setup and Operation.
Models with Push-In Plus Terminal
Blocks Added to Lineup.
•
The white PV display with a height of 15.2 mm improves visibility.
• High-speed sampling at 50 ms.
• Select from models with screw terminal blocks, models with
Push-In Plus terminal blocks for reduced wiring work, and
Plug-in Models that can be removed from the terminal block.
• Short body with depth of only 60 mm. (Screw Terminal Blocks)
• Easy connections to a PLC with programless communications.
Use component communications to link Temperature
Controllers to each other.
• Set up the Controller without wiring the power supply by connecting to the computer with a Communications
Conversion Cable (sold separately). Setup is easy with the CX-Thermo (sold separately).
Main I/O Functions
48 × 48 mm
Screw Terminal
Blocks
E5CC
Refer to Safety Precautions on 122.
Refer to your OMRON website for the most recent information on
applicable safety standards.
48 × 48 mm
Plug-in Models
E5CC-U
*
48 × 48 mm
Push-In Plus
Terminal Blocks
E5CC-B
*CSA conformance
evaluation by UL.
Sensor Input
Dual displays: PV/SV 4-digit displays
E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U
Universal input
• Thermocouple
• Pt
• Analog current/voltage
Indication Accuracy
• Thermocouple input
<E5CC/E5CC-B> ±0.3%PV
<E5CC-U>±1%PV
• Pt input: ±0.2% of PV
• Analog input: ±0.2% of FS
Sampling Period
• 50 ms
Event Inputs
<E5CC>
• None
• 2
• 4
Remote SP Input
Control Output 1
• Relay output
• Voltage output
(for driving SSR)
• Linear current output
Control Output 2
Transfer Output
• PF (shift) Key
• Temperature status display
• Simple programming
• Independent heating and
cooling PID control
• Changed parameter display
• Display brightness setting
Auxiliary Outputs
Serial Communications
<E5CC-B>
• None
• 2
<E5CC-U>
• None
<E5CC>
• None
• 1
<E5CC-B/E5CC-U>
• None
<E5CC/E5CC-B>
• None
• RS-485
<E5CC-U>
• None
<E5CC>
• None
• Voltage output
(for driving SSR)
<E5CC-B/E5CC-U>
• None
<E5CC>
• 3
<E5CC-B>
• 2
<E5CC-U>
• None
• 1
• 2
<E5CC/E5CC-B>
• None
• 1
<E5CC-U>
• None
This datasheet is provided as a guideline for selecting products.
Be sure to refer to the following manuals for application precautions and other information required for operation before attempting
to use the product.
E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers User’s Manual (Cat. No. H174)
E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers Communications Manual (Cat. No. H175)
E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U
19
Model Number Legend and Standard Models
Model Number Legend
Models with Screw Terminal Blocks
E5CC-@@ 3@5M-@@@ (Example: E5CC-RX3A5M-000)
−− −−− −
−−−
ABCDEF
*1. Options with HB and HS alarms (001 and 003) cannot be selected if a linear current output is selected for the control output.
*2. The control output cannot be used as a transfer output.
*3. Option 004 can be selected only when "CX" is selected for the control outputs.
Note: Draw-out-type models of the E5CC are available. Ask your OMRON representative for details.
Heating and Cooling Control
Using Heating and Cooling Control
A Control Output Assignment
If there is no control output 2, an auxiliary output is used as the cooling control output.
If there is a control output 2, the two control outputs are used for heating and cooling.
(It does not matter which output is used for heating and which output is used for cooling.)
B Control
If PID control is used, you can set PID control separately for heating and cooling.
This allows you to handle control systems with different heating and cooling response characteristics.
Model
A BCDEF
Meaning
Control outputs
1 and 2
No. of
auxiliary
outputs
Power
supply
voltage
Terminal
type
Input
type Options
E5CC 48 × 48 mm
Control output 1 Control output 2
RX Relay output None
QX Voltage output
(for driving SSR) None
*1 *3CX Linear current output *2 None
QQ Voltage output
(for driving SSR)
Voltage output
(for driving SSR)
CQ Linear current output *2Voltage output
(for driving SSR)
33 (one common)
A100 to 240 VAC
D24 VAC/DC
5Screw terminal blocks (with cover)
MUniversal input
HB alarm and
HS alarm
Communications
Event
inputs
Remote
SP Input
Transfer
output
000 --- --- --- --- ---
*1001 1 --- 2 --- ---
*1003
2
(for 3-phase
heaters)
RS-485 --- --- ---
*3004 --- RS-485 2 --- ---
005 --- --- 4 --- ---
006 --- --- 2 Provided.
007 --- --- 2 Provided. ---
E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U
20
Model Number Legend
Models with Push-In Plus Terminal Blocks
E5CC-@@ 2@BM-@@@ (Example: E5CC-RX2ABM-000)
−− −−− −
−−−
ABCDEF
*1. Options with HB and HS alarms (001, 002) cannot be selected if a linear current output is selected for the control output.
*2. The control output cannot be used as a transfer output.
Heating and Cooling Control
Using Heating and Cooling Control
A Control Output Assignment
An auxiliary output is used as the cooling control output.
B Control
If PID control is used, you can set PID control separately for heating and cooling.
This allows you to handle control systems with different heating and cooling response characteristics.
Model
A B C D E F
Meaning
Control outputs
1 and 2
No. of
auxiliary
outputs
Power
supply
voltage
Terminal
type
Input
type Options
E5CC 48 × 48 mm
Control output 1 Control output 2
RX Relay output None
QX Voltage output
(for driving SSR) None
*1CX Linear current output *2 None
22 (one common)
A100 to 240 VAC
D24 VAC/DC
BPush-in plus terminal blocks
MUniversal input
HB alarm and
HS alarm
Communications
Event
inputs
Remote
SP Input
Transfer
output
000 --- --- --- --- ---
*1001 1 --- 2 --- ---
*1002 1 RS-485 --- --- ---
004 --- RS-485 2 --- ---
006 --- --- 2 --- Provided.
E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U
21
Model Number Legend
Plug-in Models
E5CC-@@ @ @ U M -000 (Example: E5CC-RW0AUM-000)
ABCDEF
*The control output can be used as a simple transfer output for the Digital Temperature Controllers manufactured in May 2014 or later.
List of Models
Heating and Cooling Control
Using Heating and Cooling Control
A Control Output Assignment
An auxiliary output is used as the cooling control output.
B Control
If PID control is used, you can set PID control separately for heating and cooling.
This allows you to handle control systems with different heating and cooling response characteristics.
Model
ABCDEF
Meaning
Control
outputs
1 and 2
No. of
auxiliary
outputs
Power
supply
voltage
Terminal
type
Input
type Options
E5CC 48 × 48 mm
Control output 1 Control output 2
RW Relay output (SPDT) None
QX Voltage output (for driving SSR) None
CX Linear current output * None
0None
11
22 (one common)
A100 to 240 VAC
D24 VAC/DC
UPlug-in model
MUniversal input
HB alarm and HS
alarm
Communi-
cations
Event inputs
Remote SP
Input
Transfer
output
000 --- --- --- --- ---
Control output No. of auxiliary
outputs
Options Model Model
HB alarm and
HS alarm
No. of event
inputs Communications
Power supply voltage Power supply voltage
100 to 240 VAC 24 VAC/DC
Relay output
---
--- --- ---
E5CC-RW0AUM-000 E5CC-RW0DUM-000
1E5CC-RW1AUM-000 E5CC-RW1DUM-000
2E5CC-RW2AUM-000 E5CC-RW2DUM-000
Voltage output
(for driving SSR)
---
--- --- ---
E5CC-QX0AUM-000 E5CC-QX0DUM-000
1E5CC-QX1AUM-000 E5CC-QX1DUM-000
2E5CC-QX2AUM-000 E5CC-QX2DUM-000
Linear current
output
---
--- --- ---
E5CC-CX0AUM-000 E5CC-CX0DUM-000
1E5CC-CX1AUM-000 E5CC-CX1DUM-000
2E5CC-CX2AUM-000 E5CC-CX2DUM-000
E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U
22
Optional Products (Order Separately)
USB-Serial Conversion Cable
Terminal Covers (for E5CC)
Note: The E53-COV10 cannot be used.
Refer to page 33 for the mounted dimensions.
Waterproof Packing
Note:
The Waterproof Packing is provided only with E5CC/E5CC-B
Controllers.
The E5CC-U cannot be waterproofed even if the Waterproof
Packing is attached.
Current Transformers (CTs)
＊LeadwiresareincludedwiththeseCTs.IfULcertificationisrequired,use
theseCTs.
Adapter
Note: Use this Adapter when the panel has already been prepared for
an E5B@ Controller.
Waterproof Cover
Mounting Adapter
Note: This Mounting Adapter is provided with the Digital Temperature
Controller.
DIN Track Mounting Adapter (for E5CC)
Sockets (for E5CC-U)
Front Covers
CX-Thermo Support Software
Note: CX-Thermo version 4.5 or higher is required for the E5CC.
CX-Thermo version 4.61 or higher is required for the E5CC-U.
CX-Thermo version 4.65 or higher is required for the E5CC-B.
CX-Thermo version 4.67 or higher is required for the E5CC-B
linear current output type.
For the system requirements for the CX-Thermo, refer to
information on the EST2-2C-MV4 on the OMRON website
(www.ia.omron.com).
Model
E58-CIFQ2
Model
E53-COV17
E53-COV23 (3pcs)
Model
Y92S-P8
Hole diameter Model
5.8 mm E54-CT1
5.8 mm E54-CT1L *
12.0 mm E54-CT3
12.0 mm E54-CT3L *
Model
Y92F-45
Model
Y92A-48N
Model
Y92F-49
Model
Y92F-52
Type Model
Front-connecting Socket P2CF-11
Front-connecting Socket with Finger Protection P2CF-11-E
Back-connecting Socket P3GA-11
Terminal Cover for Back-connecting socket
with Finger Protection Y92A-48G
Type Model
Hard Front Cover Y92A-48H
Soft Front Cover Y92A-48D
Model
EST2-2C-MV4
E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U
23
Specifications
Ratings
*1. There are no optional functions for the E5CC-U. Refer to Model Number Legend and List of Models on page 21.
*2. This function is not supported by the E5CC-B. Refer to Model Number Legend on page 20.
*3. With the E5CC-B, there can be up to four set points if event inputs are used to select them.
Power supply voltage A in model number: 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
D in model number: 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz; 24 VDC
Operating voltage range 85% to 110% of rated supply voltage
Power consumption
Models with option selection of 000:5.2 VA max. at 100 to 240 VAC, and 3.1 VA max. at 24 VAC or
1.6 W max. at 24 VDC
All other models: 6.5 VA max. at 100 to 240 VAC, and 4.1 VA max. at 24 VAC or 2.3 W max. at 24 VDC
Sensor input
Temperature input
Thermocouple: K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B, C/W, or PL II
Platinum resistance thermometer: Pt100 or JPt100
Infrared temperature sensor (ES1B): 10 to 70°C, 60 to 120°C, 115 to 165°C, or 140 to 260°C
Analog input
Current input: 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA
Voltage input: 1 to 5 V, 0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V,or 0 to 50 mV (The 0 to 50 mV range applies to the
E5CC-U only for those manufactured in May 2014 or later.)
Input impedance Current input: 150 Ω max., Voltage input: 1 MΩ min.
(Use a 1:1 connection when connecting the ES2-HB-N/THB-N.)
Control method ON/OFF control or 2-PID control (with auto-tuning)
Control
output
Relay output
E5CC/E5CC-B: SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load), electrical life: 100,000 operations,
minimum applicable load: 5 V, 10 mA (reference value)
E5CC-U: SPDT, 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load), electrical life: 100,000 operations,
minimum applicable load: 5 V, 10 mA (reference value)
Voltage output
(for driving SSR) Output voltage: 12 VDC ±20% (PNP), max. load current: 21 mA, with short-circuit protection circuit
Linear current output 4 to 20 mA DC/0 to 20 mA DC, load: 500 Ω max., resolution: approx. 10,000
Auxiliary
output
Number of outputs
E5CC: 3
E5CC-B: 2
E5CC-U: 1 or 2 (depends on model)
Output specifications
SPST-NO relay outputs, 250 VAC, Models with 1 output: 3 A (resistive load), E5CC-U models with 2
outputs: 3 A (resistive load), E5CC-B models with 2 outputs: 2 A (resistive load), Models with 3
outputs: 2 A (resistive load), Electrical life: 100,000 operations, Minimum applicable load: 10 mA at
5 V (reference value)
Event
input *1
Number of inputs E5CC: 2 or 4 (depends on model)
E5CC-B: 2 (depends on model)
External contact input
specifications
Contact input: ON: 1 kΩ max., OFF: 100 kΩ min.
Non-contact input: ON: Residual voltage: 1.5 V max., OFF: Leakage current: 0.1 mA max.
Current flow: Approx. 7 mA per contact
Transfer
output *1
Number of outputs 1 (only on models with a transfer output)
Output specifications Current output: 4 to 20 mA DC, load: 500 Ω max., resolution: approx. 10,000
Linear voltage output: 1 to 5 VDC, load: 1 kΩ min., resolution: Approx. 10,000
Setting method Digital setting using front panel keys
Remote SP input *1 *2 Current input: 4 to 20 mA DC or 0 to 20 mA DC (input impedance: 150 Ω max.)
Voltage input: 1 to 5 V, 0 to 5 V, or 0 to 10 V (input impedance: 1 MΩ min.)
Indication method 11-segment digital display and individual indicators
Character height: PV: 15.2 mm, SV: 7.1 mm
Multi SP *3Up to eight set points (SP0 to SP7) can be saved and selected using the event inputs, key operations,
or serial communications.
Bank switching None
Other functions
Manual output, heating/cooling control, loop burnout alarm, SP ramp, other alarm functions, heater
burnout (HB) alarm (including SSR failure (HS) alarm), 40% AT, 100% AT, MV limiter, input digital
filter, self tuning, robust tuning, PV input shift, run/stop, protection functions, extraction of square root,
MV change rate limit, logic operations, temperature status display, simple programming, moving
average of input value, and display brightness setting
Ambient operating temperature −10 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing), For 3-year warranty: −10 to 50°C with standard mounting
(with no condensation or icing)
Ambient operating humidity 25% to 85%
Storage temperature -25 to 65°C (with no condensation or icing)
Altitude 2,000 m max.
Recommended fuse T2A, 250 VAC, time-lag, low-breaking capacity
Installation environment Overvoltage category II, Pollution Degree 2 (EN/IEC/UL 61010-1)
E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U
24
Input Ranges
Thermocouple/Platinum Resistance Thermometer (Universal inputs)
Shaded settings are the default settings.
The applicable standards for the input types are as follows:
K, J, T, E, N, R, S, B: JIS C 1602-2015, IEC 60584-1 JPt100: JIS C 1604-1989, JIS C 1606-1989
L: Fe-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985 Pt100: JIS C 1604-1997, IEC 60751
U: Cu-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985 PL II: According to Platinel II electromotive force charts from BASF (previously Engelhard)
C/W: W5Re/W26Re, JIS C 1602-2015, ASTM E988-1990
Analog input
*The range applies to the E5CC-U only for those manufactured in May 2014 or later.
Sensor
type
Platinum resistance
thermometer Thermocouple Infrared temperature
sensor
Sensor
specification
Pt100 JPt100 K J T E L U N R S B
C/W PLII
10 to
70°C
60 to
120°C
115 to
165°C
140 to
260°C
2300
1800
1700
1600
1500
1400
1300
1200
1100
1000
900
800
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
0
-100
-200
2300
1800
1700 1700
1300 1300 1300
850 850 850
600
500.0 500.0 500.0
400.0
400
400.0
400
400.0
260
120 165
100.0 100.0
90
100
0.0 0.0 00 000000
-20.0
-100
-20.0
-100
-200
-199.9 199.9
-200 -200
-199.9
-200 -200
-199.9
-200
Set value 012345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Input type Current Voltage
Input
specification
4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA
1 to 5 V 0 to 5 V 0 to 10 V 0 to 50 mV*
Setting range
Usable in the following ranges by scaling:
-1999 to 9999, -199.9 to 999.9,
-19.99 to 99.99 or -1.999 to 9.999
Set value 25 26 27 28 29 30
Temperature range (°C)
E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U
25
Alarm Types
Each alarm can be independently set to one of the following 19 alarm types. The default is 2: Upper limit. (see note.)
Auxiliary outputs are allocated for alarms. ON delays and OFF delays (0 to 999 s) can also be specified.
Note:
In the default settings for models with HB or HS alarms, alarm 1 is set to a heater alarm (HA) and the Alarm Type 1 parameter is not displayed.
To use alarm 1, set the output assignment to alarm 1.
Set
value
Alarm type
Alarm output operation
Description of function
When alarm value X
is positive
When alarm value X
is negative
0 Alarm function OFF Output OFF No alarm
1 Upper- and lower-limit *1*2
Set the upward deviation in the set point for the alarm upper
limit (H) and the lower deviation in the set point for the alarm
lower limit (L). The alarm is ON when the PV is outside this
deviation range.
2
(default) Upper-limit
Set the upward deviation in the set point by setting the alarm
value (X). The alarm is ON when the PV is higher than the
SP by the deviation or more.
3 Lower-limit
Set the downward deviation in the set point by setting the
alarm value (X). The alarm is ON when the PV is lower than
the SP by the deviation or more.
4Upper- and lower-limit
range *1*3
Set the upward deviation in the set point for the alarm upper
limit (H) and the lower deviation in the set point for the alarm
lower limit (L). The alarm is ON when the PV is inside this
deviation range.
5
Upper- and lower-limit with
standby sequence
*
1
*4A standby sequence is added to the upper- and lower-limit
alarm (1). *6
6Upper-limit with standby
sequence A standby sequence is added to the upper-limit alarm (2). *6
7Lower-limit with standby
sequence A standby sequence is added to the lower-limit alarm (3). *6
8Absolute-value upper-
limit
The alarm will turn ON if the process value is larger than the
alarm value (X) regardless of the set point.
9 Absolute-value lower-limit The alarm will turn ON if the process value is smaller than the
alarm value (X) regardless of the set point.
10
Absolute-value upper-
limit with standby
sequence
A standby sequence is added to the absolute-value upper-
limit alarm (8). *6
11 Absolute-value lower-limit
with standby sequence
A standby sequence is added to the absolute-value lower-
limit alarm (9). *6
12
LBA (alarm 1 type only)
-*7
13 PV change rate alarm - *8
14 SP absolute-value
upper-limit alarm
This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the set point (SP)
is higher than the alarm value (X).
15 SP absolute-value
lower-limit alarm
This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the set point (SP)
is lower than the alarm value (X).
16 MV absolute-value
upper-limit alarm *9
Standard Control Standard Control
This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the manipulated
variable (MV) is higher than the alarm value (X).
Heating/Cooling
Control (Heating MV) Heating/Cooling
Control (Heating MV)
Always ON
17 MV absolute-value
lower-limit alarm *9
Standard Control Standard Control
This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the manipulated
variable (MV) is lower than the alarm value (X).
Heating/Cooling
Control (Cooling MV) Heating/Cooling
Control (Cooling MV)
Always ON
18 RSP absolute-value
upper-limit alarm *10
This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the remote SP
(RSP) is higher than the alarm value (X).
19 RSP absolute-value
lower-limit alarm *10
This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the remote SP
(RSP) is lower than the alarm value (X).
ON
OFF PV
SP
LH
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
SP
LH
ON
OFF PV
SP
LH
ON
OFF PV
*
5
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF SP
0
X
ON
OFF SP
0
X
ON
OFF SP
0
X
ON
OFF SP
0
X
ON
OFF MV
0
X
ON
OFF MV
0
X
ON
OFF MV
0
X
ON
OFF MV
0
X
ON
OFF MV
0
X
ON
OFF MV
0
X
ON
OFF RSP
0
X
ON
OFF RSP
0
X
ON
OFF RSP
0
X
ON
OFF RSP
E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U
26
*1. With set values 1, 4 and 5, the upper and lower limit values can
be set independently for each alarm type, and are expressed as
“L” and “H.”
*2. Set value: 1, Upper- and lower-limit alarm
*3. Set value: 4, Upper- and lower-limit range
*4. Set value: 5, Upper- and lower-limit with standby sequence
For Upper- and Lower-Limit Alarm Described Above *2
• Case 1 and 2
Always OFF when the upper-limit and lower-limit hysteresis overlaps.
• Case 3: Always OFF
*5. Set value: 5, Upper- and lower-limit with standby sequence
Always OFF when the upper-limit and lower-limit hysteresis
overlaps.
*6. Refer to the E5
@
C Digital Temperature Controllers User's Manual
(Cat. No. H174) for information on the operation of the standby
sequence.
*7. Refer to the E5
@
C Digital Temperature Controllers User's Manual
(Cat. No.H174) for information on the loop burnout alarm (LBA).
*8. Refer to the E5
@
C Digital Temperature Controllers User's Manual
(Cat. No. H174) for information on the PV change rate alarm.
*9. When heating/cooling control is performed, the MV absolute
upper limit alarm functions only for the heating operation and the
MV absolute lower limit alarm functions only for the cooling
operation.
*10.This value is displayed only when a remote SP input is used. It
functions in both Local SP Mode and Remote SP Mode.
Remote SP input is supported only for the E5CC.
LH
H<0, L>0
|H| < |L|
SP
Case 1
LH
H>0, L<0
|H| > |L|
SP
Case 2
LH
H<0, L<0
SP
LH
H<0, L>0
|H| ≥ |L|
SP
LH
H>0, L<0
|H| ≤ |L|
SP
Case 3 (Always ON)
LH
H<0, L>0
|H| < |L|
SP
Case 1
LH
H>0, L<0
|H| > |L|
SP
Case 2
LH
H<0, L<0
SP
L
L
H
H<0, L>0
|H| ≥ |L|
SP
H
H>0, L<0
|H| ≤ |L|
SP
Case 3 (Always OFF)
E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U
27
Characteristics
*1. The indication accuracy of K thermocouples in the -200 to 1,300°C range, T and N thermocouples at a temperature of -100°C max., and U and
L thermocouples at any temperatures is ±2°C ±1 digit max. The indication accuracy of the B thermocouple at a temperature of 400°C max. is
not specified. The indication accuracy of B thermocouples at a temperature of 400 to 800°C is ±3°C max. The indication accuracy of the R and
S thermocouples at a temperature of 200°C max. is ±3°C ±1 digit max. The indication accuracy of C/W thermocouples is (±0.3% of PV or ±3°C,
whichever is greater) ±1 digit max. The indication accuracy of PL II thermocouples is (±0.3% of PV or ±2°C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max.
*2. However, the precision between 0 and 4 mA for a 0 to 20 mA output is ±1% FS max.
*3. Ambient temperature: -10°C to 23°C to 55°C, Voltage range: -15% to 10% of rated voltage
*4. K thermocouple at -100°C max.: ±10°C max.
*5. The unit is determined by the setting of the Integral/Derivative Time Unit parameter.
*6. External communications (RS-485) and USB-serial conversion cable communications can be used at the same time.
*7. CX-Thermo version 4.67 or higher is required for the E5CC-B linear current output type.
Indication accuracy
(at the ambient temperature of 23°C)
E5CC/E5CC-B
Thermocouple: (±0.3% of indication value or ±1°C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max. *1
Platinum resistance thermometer: (
±
0.2% of indication value or
±
0.8°C, whichever is greater)
±
1 digit max.
Analog input:
±
0.2% FS
±
1 digit max.
CT input: ±5% FS ±1 digit max.
E5CC-U
Thermocouple: (±1% of indication value or ±2°C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max. *1
Platinum resistance thermometer: (
±
0.2% of indication value or
±
0.8°C, whichever is greater)
±
1 digit max.
Analog input:
±
0.2% FS
±
1 digit max.
Transfer output accuracy ±0.3% FS max.
Simple transfer output accuracy ±0.3% FS max.*2
Remote SP Input Type ±0.2% FS ±1 digit max.
Influence of temperature *3
Thermocouple input (R, S, B, C/W, PL II): (
±
1% of indication value or
±
10°C, whichever is greater)
±
1 digit max.
Other thermocouple input: (±1% of indication value or ±4°C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max. *4
Platinum resistance thermometer: (±1% of indication value or ±2°C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max.
Analog input: ±1%FS ±1 digit max.
CT input: ±5% FS ±1 digit max.
Remote SP input: ±1% FS ±1 digit max.
Influence of voltage *3
Influence of EMS.
(at EN 61326-1)
Input sampling period 50 ms
Hysteresis Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9°C or °F (in units of 0.1°C or °F)
Analog input: 0.01% to 99.99% FS (in units of 0.01% FS)
Proportional band (P) Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9°C or °F (in units of 0.1°C or °F)
Analog input: 0.1% to 999.9% FS (in units of 0.1% FS)
Integral time (I) 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *5
Derivative time (D) 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *5
Proportional band (P) for cooling Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9°C or °F (in units of 0.1°C or °F)
Analog input: 0.1% to 999.9% FS (in units of 0.1% FS)
Integral time (I) for cooling 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *5
Derivative time (D) for cooling 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *5
Control period 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1 to 99 s (in units of 1 s)
Manual reset value 0.0 to 100.0% (in units of 0.1%)
Alarm setting range -1999 to 9999 (decimal point position depends on input type)
Influence of signal source resistance Thermocouple: 0.1°C/Ω max. (100 Ωmax.)
Platinum resistance thermometer: 0.1°C/Ω max. (10 Ω max.)
Insulation resistance 20 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC)
Dielectric strength 3,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of different charge
Vibration Malfunction 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s2 for 10 min each in X, Y, and Z directions
Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s2 for 2 hrs each in X, Y, and Z directions
Shock Malfunction 100 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions
Resistance 300 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions
Weight E5CC/E5CC-B: Controller: Approx. 120 g, Mounting Adapter: Approx. 10 g
E5CC-U: Controller: Approx. 100 g, Mounting Adapter: Approx. 10 g
Degree of protection E5CC/E5CC-B: Front panel: IP66, Rear case: IP20, Terminals: IP00
E5CC-U: Front panel: IP50, Rear case: IP20, Terminals: IP00
Memory protection Non-volatile memory (number of writes: 1,000,000 times)
Setup Tool
E5CC: CX-Thermo version 4.5 or higher
E5CC-B: CX-Thermo version 4.65 or higher *7
E5CC-U: CX-Thermo version 4.61 or higher
Setup Tool port E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U top panel: An E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is used to connect
to a USB port on the computer. *6
E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U
28
*8. The E5CC-U plug-in model is certified for UL listing only when used together with the OMRON P2CF-11 or P2CF-11-E Socket. The P3GA-11
is not certified for UL listing.
*9. Access the following website for information on certified models. http://www.ia.omron.com/support/models/index.html
*10.Refer to information on maritime standards in Shipping Standards on page 124 for compliance with Lloyd's Standards.
*11.Industrial electromagnetic environment (EN/IEC 61326-1 Table 2)
Standards Approved standards
cULus: UL 61010-1/CSA C22.2 No.61010-1 *8, KOSHA (S Mark) certification (Some models only.) *9,
Korean wireless regulations (Radio law: KC Mark) (Some models only.) *9, Lloyd's standards *10,
EAC
Conformed standards EN 61010-1 (IEC 61010-1), RCM
EMC
EMI: EN 61326-1 *11
Radiated Interference Electromagnetic Field Strength: EN 55011 Group 1, class A
Noise Terminal Voltage: EN 55011 Group 1, class A
EMS: EN 61326-1 *11
ESD Immunity: EN 61000-4-2
Electromagnetic Field Immunity: EN 61000-4-3
Burst Noise Immunity: EN 61000-4-4
Conducted Disturbance Immunity: EN 61000-4-6
Surge Immunity: EN 61000-4-5
Voltage Dip/Interrupting Immunity: EN 61000-4-11
E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U
29
USB-Serial Conversion Cable
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and or other countries.
*1. CX-Thermo version 4.65 or higher runs on Windows 10.
*2. Use a high-power port for the USB port.
*3. CX-Thermo version 4.67 or higher is required for the E5CC-B
linear current output type.
Note:
A driver must be installed on the computer. Refer to the
Instruction
Manual
included with the Cable for the installation procedure.
Communications Specifications
*The baud rate, data bit length, stop bit length, and vertical parity can
be individually set using the Communications Setting Level.
Communications Functions
MELSEC is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
KEYENCE is a registered trademark of Keyence Corporation.
*1. A Temperature Controller with version 1.1 or higher is required.
A Temperature Controller with version 2.1 or higher is required for
the FX Series or the KV Series.
*2. Both the programless communications and the component
communications support the copying.
Current Transformer (Order Separately) Ratings
Heater Burnout Alarms and SSR Failure Alarms
*1. For heater burnout alarms, the heater current will be measured
when the control output is ON, and the output will turn ON if the
heater current is lower than the set value (i.e., heater burnout
detection current value).
*2.
For SSR failure alarms, the heater current will be measured when the
control output is OFF, and the output will turn ON if the heater current
is higher than the set value (i.e., SSR failure detection current value).
*3. The value is 30 ms for a control period of 0.1 s or 0.2 s.
*4. The value is 35 ms for a control period of 0.1 s or 0.2 s.
Electrical Life Expectancy Curve for
Control Output Relays (Reference Values)
Applicable OS Windows XP/Vista/7/8/10 *1
Applicable software
CX-Thermo version 4.5 or higher
(Version 4.61 or higher is required for the
E5CC-U, Version 4.65 or higher is required
for the E5CC-B *3.)
Applicable models
E5
@
C-T Series, E5
@
C Series, and E5CB Series
USB interface standard
Conforms to USB Specification 2.0.
DTE speed 38400 bps
Connector
specifications
Computer: USB (type A plug)
Digital Temperature Controller:
Special serial connector
Power supply
Bus power (Supplied from USB host controller.)
*
2
Power supply voltage
5 VDC
Current consumption
450 mA max.
Output voltage
4.7±0.2 VDC
(Supplied from USB-Serial Conversion Cable
to the Digital Temperature Controller.)
Output current
250 mA max.
(Supplied from USB-Serial Conversion Cable
to the Digital Temperature Controller.)
Ambient operating
temperature 0 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing)
Ambient operating humidity
10% to 80%
Storage temperature -20 to 60°C (with no condensation or icing)
Storage humidity 10% to 80%
Altitude 2,000 m max.
Weight Approx. 120 g
Transmission line
connection method RS-485: Multidrop
Communications RS-485 (two-wire, half duplex)
Synchronization method
Start-stop synchronization
Protocol CompoWay/F, or Modbus
Baud rate *9600, 19200, 38400, or 57600 bps
Transmission code ASCII
Data bit length *7 or 8 bits
Stop bit length *1 or 2 bits
Error detection
Vertical parity (none, even, odd)
Block check character (BCC) with
CompoWay/F or CRC-16 Modbus
Flow control None
Interface RS-485
Retry function None
Communications buffer
217 bytes
Communications
response wait time
0 to 99 ms
Default: 20 ms
Programless
communications *1
You can use the memory in the PLC to read and write
E5
@
C parameters, start and stop operation, etc. The
E5
@
C automatically performs communications with
PLCs. No communications programming is required.
Number of connected Digital Temperature
Controllers: 32 max. (Up to 16 for the FX Series)
Applicable PLCs
OMRON PLCs
CS Series, CJ Series, CP Series,
NJ Series, or NX1P
Mitsubishi Electric PLCs
MELSEC Q Series, L Series, FX3 Series,
or iQ-R Series
KEYENCE PLCs
KEYENCE KV Series
Component
Communications *1
When Digital Temperature Controllers are
connected, set points and RUN/STOP
commands can be sent from the Digital
Temperature Controller that is set as the
master to the Digital Temperature
Controllers that are set as slaves.
Slope and offsets can be set for the set point.
Number of connected Digital Temperature
Controllers: 32 max. (including master)
Copying *2
When Digital Temperature Controllers are
connected, the parameters can be copied
from the Digital Temperature Controller that is
set as the master to the Digital Temperature
Controllers that are set as slaves.
E54-CT1
E54-CT3
E54-CT1L
E54-CT3L
Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC for 1 min 1,500 VAC for 1 min
Vibration resistance
50 Hz, 98 m/s2
Weight
E54-CT1: Approx. 11.5 g
E54-CT3: Approx. 50 g
E54-CT1L: Approx. 14 g
E54-CT3L: Approx. 57 g
Accessories
E54-CT3 Only
Armatures (2)
Plugs (2)
None
CT input (for heater
current detection)
Models with detection for single-phase
heaters: One input
Models with detection for singlephase or
three-phase heaters: Two inputs
Maximum heater current
50 A AC
Input current
indication accuracy ±5% FS ±1 digit max.
Heater burnout alarm
setting range
*
1
0.1 to 49.9 A (in units of 0.1 A)
Minimum detection ON time: 100 ms *3
SSR failure alarm
setting range *2
0.1 to 49.9 A (in units of 0.1 A)
Minimum detection OFF time: 100 ms *4
500
300
100
50
30
10
5
3
1
0123456
Switching current (A)
E5CC/E5CC-B
250 VAC, 30 VDC
(resistive load)
cosφ = 1
Life (× 104 operations)
E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U
30
External Connections
E5CC (Screw Terminal Blocks)
Note: 1. The application of the terminals depends on the model.
2. Do not wire the terminals that are shown with a gray background.
3. When complying with EMC standards, the cable that connects the sensor must be 30 m or less.
If the cable length exceeds 30 m, compliance with EMC standards will not be possible.
4. Connect M3 crimped terminals.
5. Due to UL Listing requirements, use the E54-CT1L or E54-CT3L Current Transformer with the factory wiring (internal wiring).
Use a UL category XOBA or XOBA7 current transformer that is UL Listed for field wiring (external wiring) and not the factory wiring
(internal wiring).
Voltage output
(for driving SSR)
12 VDC, 21 mA
Control output 2
The E5CC is set for a K-type thermocouple (input type = 5) by
default. An input error (s.err) will occur if the input type setting does
not agree with the temperature sensor. Check the input type.
Control output 1
Relay output
250 VAC, 3A
(resistive load)
Voltage output
(for driving SSR)
12 VDC, 21 mA
Linear current output
0 to 20 mA DC
4 to 20 mA DC
Load: 500 Ω max.
Relay outputs
Models with 3 auxiliary
outputs: 250 VAC, 2 A
(resistive load)
(no polarity)
100 to 240 VAC 24 VAC/DC
Auxiliary outputs 1, 2, 3
7
8
9
10 ●●
Auxiliary output 2
Auxiliary output 3
Auxiliary output 1
005
Event Inputs
1 to 4
004
Communications
(RS-485), and
Event Inputs 3 and 4
007
Event Inputs
1 and 2, and
Remote SP Input
006
Event Inputs
1 and 2, and
Transfer Output
001
Event Inputs 1
and 2, and CT1
003
Communications
(RS-485), CT1,
and CT2
(2) Auxiliary Outputs
(3) Input Power Supply
(5) Sensor (Temperature/Analog) Input
(6) Options
Models with
1 Linear
Current Output
Models with
1 Relay
Output
Models with 2
Voltage Outputs
(for Driving SSR)
(1) Control outputs 1, 2
Models with 1
Voltage Output
(for Driving SSR)
RX QX CX QQ
Auxiliary outputs 1, 2, 3
E5CC-@@ 3 @ 5 M - @@@
↑
Terminal type
Models with 2 Outputs: Linear Current
Output and Voltage (for Driving SSR)
CQ
17
18 12
15
16
1
2
13
14
3
11
4
6
7
8
9
10
5
6
4
5
6
5
6
Pt
A
B
B
+
-
m
A
-
+
5
4
V
-5
V6
+
4
TC
4
I
11
12
11
12
18
13
16
17
16
17
18
13
16
17
18
13
14
15
13
14
15
16
18
13
14
15
16
17
18
16
17
13
17
18
V
I
V
m
A
14
15
14
15
14
15
EV1
EV2
EV1
EV2
EV1
EV2
EV1
EV2
EV3
EV4
EV3
EV4
CT1
B(+)
A(-)
RS-485
B(+)
A(-)
RS-485
CT2
COM
CT1
+-
3
1
2
3
1
2-
3+Q
1+
2-
3
C
OUT1
C
OUT1
OUT1
OUT2
Q
OUT1
R
1
2
+
3+Q
1+
2-
Q
OUT1
OUT2
(-)
(-)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Use no-voltage inputs for the event inputs.
The polarity for non-contact inputs is given in parentheses.
(-)
(-) (-)
+
++
(-)
-
+
-
E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U
31
E5CC-B (Push-In Plus Terminal Blocks)
Note: 1. The application of the terminals depends on the model.
2. Do not wire the terminals that are shown with a gray background.
3. When complying with EMC standards, the cable that connects the sensor must be 30 m or less.
If the cable length exceeds 30 m, compliance with EMC standards will not be possible.
4. Refer to Wiring Precautions for E5
@
C-B (Controllers with Push-In Plus Terminal Blocks) on page 133 for wire specifications and wiring
methods.
5. Common terminals are indicated with asterisks (*). You can use the input power supply and communications common terminals for
crossover wiring. Do not exceed the maximum number of Temperature Controllers given below if you use crossover wiring for the input
power supply.
100 to 240 VAC Controllers: 16 max.
24 VAC/VDC Controllers: 8 max.
6. Due to UL Listing requirements, use the E54-CT1L or E54-CT3L Current Transformer with the factory wiring (internal wiring). Use a UL
category XOBA or XOBA7 current transformer that is UL Listed for field wiring (external wiring) and not the factory wiring (internal wiring).
23
19
22
1
2
17
18
3
15
24 16
6
8
9
14
21513
20412
11
10
7
8
6
7
8
7
88
Pt
A
B
B
+
-
m
A
-
+
7
6
V
-7
V
+
6
TC
6
I
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
EV2
EV1
(-)
EV2
EV1
EV4
EV3
CT1CT1
B(+)
A(-)
RS-485
B(+)
A(-)
RS-485
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
*
*
*
13
14
15
16
*
*
* * * *
*
*
*
(no polarity)
100 to 240 VAC 24 VAC/DC
Auxiliary output 2
Auxiliary output 1
004
Communications
(RS-485), and
Event Inputs 3 and 4
006
Event Inputs
1 and 2, and
Transfer Output
001
Event Inputs 1
and 2, and CT1
002
Communications
(RS-485), CT1
(2) Auxiliary Outputs
(3) Input Power Supply
(5) Sensor (Temperature/Analog) Input
(6) Options
Relay outputs
outputs: 250 VAC, 2 A
(resistive load)
Auxiliary outputs 1, 2
(-)
(-)
(-)
(-)
(-)
Use no-voltage inputs for the event inputs.
The polarity for non-contact inputs is given in parentheses.
+
+
-
V
I
Transfer
Output
Models with
1 Relay Output
(1) Control output 1
Models with 1
Voltage Output
(for Driving SSR)
OUT1
R
1
2
RX
1
2
OUT1
Q
QX
+
−
Models with 1
Linear Current Output
1
2
OUT1
C
CX
+
−
The E5CC is set for a K-type thermocouple
(input type = 5) by default. An input error
(s.err) will occur if the input type setting does
not agree with the temperature sensor. Check
the input type.
E5CC-@@ 2 @ B M - @@@
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
↑
Terminal type
Control output 1
Relay output
250 VAC, 3A
(resistive load)
Voltage output
(for driving SSR)
12 VDC, 21 mA
13
14
15
16
To another E5@C
Wiring Example:
E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U
32
E5CC-U (Plug-in Models)
Note: 1. The application of the terminals depends on the model.
2. Do not wire the terminals that are shown with a gray background.
3. When complying with EMC standards, the cable that connects the sensor must be 30 m or less.
If the cable length exceeds 30 m, compliance with EMC standards will not be possible.
4. Connect M3.5 crimped terminals.
Isolation/Insulation Block Diagrams
E5CC
Models with 3 Auxiliary Outputs
E5CC-B
Models with 2 Auxiliary Outputs
E5CC-U
Models with 2 Auxiliary Outputs
A
B
B
+
−
250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load)
Control output 1
•
•
Auxiliary output 1
Relay output
−
+
V
−
mA
+
The E5CC-U is set for a K-type thermocouple (input type =
5) by default. An input error (s.err) will occur if the input
type setting does not agree with the temperature sensor.
Check the input type.
Sensor (temperature/analog) input
Auxiliary output 2:
Control output (cooling
Control output 1:
Control output 1
100 to 240 VAC
24 VAC/DC (no polarity)
RW
CX
Models with 1
Relay Output
QX
+
−
Models with 1
Voltage Output
(for Driving SSR)
Models with 1
Linear Current
Output
Output 1
QOutput 1
C
Output 1
R
E5CC-UM-000
Control output 1
+
−
Auxiliary outputs 1, 2
Voltage output (for driving SSR)
12 VDC, 21 mA
Linear current output
4 to 20 mA DC
0 to 20 mA DC
Load: 500 Ω max.
Relay output (three terminals used)
SPDT, 250 VAC, 3 A
(resistive load)
Input power supply
I
VTC
Pt
Sensor input, CT inputs, and remote SP input
Communications and event inputs
Voltage output (for driving SSR),
linear current output, and transfer output
Relay output
Auxiliary outputs 1, 2, 3
: Reinforced insulation
: Functional isolation
Power
supply
Note: Auxiliary outputs 1 to 3 are not insulated.
Sensor input and CT input
Communications and event inputs
Voltage output (for driving SSR),
linear current output and transfer output
Relay output
Auxiliary outputs 1, 2
: Reinforced insulation
: Functional isolation
Power
supply
Sensor input
Voltage output (for driving SSR) and linear current output
Relay output
Auxiliary outputs 1 and 2
: Reinforced insulation
: Functional isolation
Power
supply
E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U
33
Nomenclature
Dimensions (Unit: mm)
Controllers
Press O Key once to go to Adjustment Level.
Press O Key for at least 3 seconds to go to Initial Setting Level.
Use the M Key to change to another parameter.
Operation indicators No. 1 display
No. 2 display
Temperature unit
Use S Key to change the digit (default setting).
Use the U D Keys to set the
parameter.
Front panel
PV or specified parameter
SP or specified parameter value
Top View of E5CC Top View of E5CC-UTop View of E5CC-B
Top-panel Setup Tool port
E5CC
E5CC-B
E5CC-U
45+0.6
0
45+0.6
0
45+0.6
0
60 min.
(48 × number of units - 2.5)+1.0
0
Panel Cutout
Mounted Separately Group Mounted
48 × 48
Mounting Adapter
(Accessory, Y92F-49
(also available for
ordering separately))
Terminal Cover
(E53-COV17)
(Order separately)
Waterproof Packing
(Accessory, Y92S-P8
(also available for
ordering separately))
44.8 × 44.8
4
1
73.1
60
5848.8
44.8 × 44.8
E5CC
• Recommended panel thickness is 1 to 5 mm.
• Group mounting is not possible in the vertical direction. (Maintain
the specified mounting space between Controllers.)
• To mount the Controller so that it is waterproof, insert the water-
proof packing onto the Controller.
• When two or more Controllers are mounted, make sure that the
surrounding temperature does not exceed the allowable operating
temperature specified in the specifications.
• Use a control panel thickness of 1 to 3 mm if the Y92A-48N and a
USB-Serial Conversion Cable are used together.
The Setup Tool port is on the top of the Temperature Controller.
It is used to connect the Temperature Controller to the computer to use the Setup Tool.
The E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is required to make the connection.
Refer to the instructions that are provided with the USB-Serial Conversion Cable for the connection procedure.
Note:
Do not leave the USB-Serial Conversion Cable connected when you use the Temperature Controller.
(71.4)
67.4
4
(1)
58
Mounting Adapter
(Accessory, Y92F-49
(also available for
ordering separately))
Waterproof Packing
(Accessory, Y92S-P8
(also available for
ordering separately))
48 × 48
44.8 × 44.8
44.8 × 44.8
E5CC-B
E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U
34
Accessories (Order Separately)
58
76.8
58.6
414.2
48 × 48 44.8 × 44.8
Mounting Adapter
(Accessory, Y92F-49 (also available for ordering separately))
45+0.6
0
45+0.6
0
45+0.6
0
60 min.
(48 × number of units - 2.5)+1.0
0
Panel Cutout
Mounted Separately Group Mounted
E5CC-U
• Recommended panel thickness is 1 to 5 mm.
• Group mounting is not possible in the vertical direction. (Maintain
the specified mounting space between Controllers.)
• When two or more Controllers are mounted, make sure that the
surrounding temperature does not exceed the allowable operating
temperature specified in the specifications.
• Use a control panel thickness of 1 to 3 mm if the Y92A-48N and a
USB-Serial Conversion Cable are used together.
The Setup Tool port is on the top of the Temperature Controller.
It is used to connect the Temperature Controller to the computer to use the Setup Tool.
The E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is required to make the connection.
Refer to the instructions that are provided with the USB-Serial Conversion Cable for the connection procedure.
Note:
Do not leave the USB-Serial Conversion Cable connected when you use the Temperature Controller.
(2110)
USB connector
(type A plug) Serial connector
LED (SD)
LED (PWR)
LED (RD)
250 1510263
USB-Serial Conversion Cable
E58-CIFQ2
48
48.8
22
9.1
10
44.8
2 3.8
Terminal Cover
(E53-COV23)
Terminal Covers
E53-COV17
Terminal Covers
E53-COV23 (Three Covers provided.)
Y92A-48G UP
P C
34
Twelve, 6.4-dia.
47.7×47.7 48×48
27.6
24.6
16.5
47.4
Terminal Cover (for the P3GA-11 Back-connecting Socket)
Y92A-48G
Note: You can attach the P3GA-11 Back-connecting Socket for finger protection.
E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U
35
Current Transformers
Waterproof Packing
Y92S-P8 (for DIN 48 × 48)
The Waterproof Packing is provided only with the E5CC/E5CC-B.
It is not included with the E5CC-U.
Order the Waterproof Packing separately if it becomes lost or damaged.
The Waterproof Packing can be used to achieve an IP66 degree of protection.
(Deterioration, shrinking, or hardening of the waterproof packing may occur depending on the
operating environment. Therefore, periodic replacement is recommended to ensure the level of
waterproofing specified in IP66. The time for periodic replacement depends on the operating
environment. Be sure to confirm this point at your site.
Consider three years as a rough standard.)
The E5CC-U cannot be waterproofed even if the Waterproof Packing is attached.
5.8 dia.
Two, 3.5 dia.
30
21
15
25 2.5
40
10.5
2.8
7.5
5
10
Filler
(epoxy)
Case
E54-CT1 Thru-current (Io) vs. Output Voltage (Eo)
(Reference Values)
E54-CT1 or E54-CT1L
Maximum continuous heater current: 50 A (50/60 Hz)
Number of windings: 400±2
Winding resistance: 18±2 Ω
Thru-current (Io) A (r.m.s.)
1 10 100mA 1 10 100
1,000A
100V
Frequency: 50 Hz
Distortion
factor
10%
3%
1%
100Ω
RL=10Ω
∞
10
1
100mV
10
1
100μV
10
1kΩ
Output voltage (Eo) V (r.m.s.)
E54-CT1L
5.8 dia. Filler (epoxy)
Case (PBT)
Shrinkable tube
Two, 3.5 dia.
Cable (AWG18)
25 2.5
115±5
8
21
10.5
40
30
5
15
10
Mark (yellow)
(12)
E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U
36
E54-CT3 Accessories
• Armature
12 dia.
2.36 dia.
Two, M3 (depth: 4)
40 × 40
30
9
30
8
Filler
(epoxy)
Case
(PBT)
15
40
Approx. 3 dia.
18
(22)
Approx. 6 dia.
Plug
Armature
Lead
E54-CT3
Connection Example
•Plug
Thru-current (Io) vs. Output Voltage (Eo)
(Reference Values)
E54-CT3 or E54-CT3L
Maximum continuous heater current: 120 A (50/60 Hz)
(Maximum continuous heater current for an OMRON
Digital Temperature Controller is 50 A.)
Number of windings: 400±2
Winding resistance: 8±0.8 Ω
Thru-current (Io) A (r.m.s.)
1 10 100mA 1 10 100
1,000A
100V
Frequency: 50 Hz
Distortion
factor
10%
3%
1%
1kΩ
100Ω
50Ω
RL=10Ω
500Ω
∞
10
1
100mV
10
1
100μV
10
Output voltage (Eo) V (r.m.s.)
Filler (epoxy)
Case (PBT)
Cable (AWG18)
12.0
dia.
30
40
8
40 15
100±5
8
Two, M3
(depth: 4)
30
E54-CT3L
E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U
37
Adapter
DIN Track Mounting Adapter
Fixture (Accessory)
69.6 to 77.6
8767 × 67
72 × 72
76
4.7
72 × 72
48 × 48
Panel (1 to 8 mm) Mounting Adapter
Y92F-30
(Accessory)
62.8
To back of the E5CC
2.2 4.7
Y92F-45
Mounted to E5CC
Note: 1. Use this Adapter when the Front Panel has already been prepared for the E5B@.
2. Only black is available.
3. You cannot use the E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable if you use the Y92F-45 Adapter. To use the USB-Serial
Conversion Cable to make the settings, do so before you mount the Temperature Controller in the panel.
4. You cannot use it together with the Y92F-49 Adapter that is enclosed with the Controller.
50
61
3.5
38
48
80.5
Mounted to E5CC
Note: This Adapter cannot be used together with the Terminal Cover.
Remove the Terminal Cover to use the Adapter.
Y92F-52
This Adapter is used to mount the
E5CC to a DIN Track.
If you use the Adapter, there is no
need for a plate to mount in the
panel or to drill mounting holes in
the panel.
E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U
38
E5CC-U Wiring Socket
Front-connecting Socket
P2CF-11
Back-connecting Socket
P3GA-11
Watertight Cover
Y92A-48N
Mounting Adapter
Y92F-49
Protective Cover Protective Cover
Y92A-48H
67.6
69
12
21.9 14
(2)
79.2
87.7
The Mounting Adapter is provided with the
Temperature Controller.
Order the Mounting Adapter separately if it
becomes lost or damaged.
This Protective Cover is soft type.
It is able to operate the controller with using
this cover.
Y92A-48D Note: This Protective Cover cannot be used
if the Waterproof Packing is installed.
This Protective Cover is hard type.
Please use it for the mis-operation
prevention etc.
40
±0.2
4.5
567
8
4
3
21
9
10 11
70 max.
4
Eleven, M3.5 × 7.5
sems screws 7.8
Two,
4.5-dia.
holes
50 max.
3
31.2 max.
35.4
Mounting Holes
Terminal Layout/Internal Connections
(Top View)
Two, 4.5 dia. mounting holes
Note: 1. A model with finger protection (P2CF-11-E) is also available.
2. You cannot use the P2CF-11 or P2CF-11-E together with the Y92F-45.
Note: Can also be mounted
to a DIN track
5 6 7 8
4
3
2
9
10
11
1
25.6
27dia.
45
45
4.5 16.3 6.2
47
3
8.7
6
Terminal Layout/Internal Connections
(Bottom View)
Eleven, M3.5
sems screws
Note: 1. Using any other sockets will adversely affect accuracy. Use only the specified sockets.
2. A Protective Cover for finger protection (Y92A-48G) is also available.
3. You cannot use the P3GA-11 together with the Y92F-45.
39
MEMO
40
Digital Temperature Controller
E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC
(48
×
96 mm/96
×
96 mm)
Large White PV Display That’s Easier to Read.
Easy to Use, from Model Selection to
Setup and Operation.
Models with Push-In Plus Terminal
Blocks Added to 48 × 96-mm Lineup.
• A white LCD PV display with a height of approx. 18 mm for the
E5EC/E5EC-B and 25 mm for the E5AC improves visibility.
• High-speed sampling at 50 ms.
• With 48 x 96-mm Controllers, you can select between screw
terminal blocks or Push-In Plus terminal blocks to save wiring work.
• Short body with depth of only 60 mm. (Screw Terminal Blocks)
• Easy connections to a PLC with programless communications.
Use component communications to link Temperature Controllers
to each other.
• Tool ports are provided both on the top panel and the front panel.
Set up the Controller without wiring the power supply by
connecting to the computer with a Communications Conversion
Cable (sold separately). Setup is easy with the CX-Thermo (sold separately).
Main I/O Functions
48 × 96 mm
Screw Terminal
Blocks
E5EC
96 × 96 mm
Screw Terminal Blocks
E5AC
Refer to your OMRON website for the most recent
information on applicable safety standards.
*
48 × 96 mm
Push-In Plus
Terminal
Blocks
E5EC-B
*CSA conformance
evaluation by UL.
E5EC/E5EC-B
4-digit
displays
Sensor Input
Indication Accuracy
• Thermocouple input:
±0.3% of PV
• Pt input: ±0.2% of PV
• Analog input: ±0.2% of FS
Sampling Period
• 50 ms
Event Inputs
• None
• 2
• 4
• 6
Remote SP Input
• None
• 1
Control Output 1
<E5EC/E5AC> <E5EC-B>
<E5EC/E5AC> <E5EC-B>
• Relay output
• Voltage output
(for driving SSR)
• Linear current output
• None
Control Output 2
• Voltage output
(for driving SSR)
• Relay output
• Linear current output
Auxiliary Outputs
• 4 • 2
• 4
Transfer Output
• None
• 1
• PF (shift) Key
• Setup Tool port on front panel
• Temperature status display
• Simple programming
• Independent heating and
cooling PID control
• Changed parameter display
• Display brightness setting
Three-level Display
PV, SV, and MV displayed
at the same time.
E5AC
Serial Communications
• None
• RS-485
Universal input
• Thermocouple
• Pt
• Analog current/voltage
This datasheet is provided as a guideline for selecting products.
Be sure to refer to the following manuals for application precautions and other information required for operation before attempting
to use the product.
E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers User’s Manual (Cat. No. H174)
E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers Communications Manual (Cat. No. H175)
Refer to Safety Precautions on page 122.
E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC
41
Model Number Legend and Standard Models
Model Number Legend
Models with Screw Terminal Blocks
E5EC-@@ 4@5M-@@@ (Example: E5EC-RX4A5M-000)
−− −−− −
−−−
ABCDEF
E5AC-@@ 4@5M-@@@ (Example: E5AC-RX4A5M-000)
−− −−− −
−−−
ABCDEF
*1. The options that can be selected depend on the type of control output.
*2. The control output cannot be used as a transfer output.
*3. A model with four auxiliary outputs must be selected.
Note: Draw-out-type models of the E5EC and E5AC are available. Ask your OMRON representative for details.
Heating and Cooling Control
Using Heating and Cooling Control
A Control Output Assignment
If there is no control output 2, an auxiliary output is used as the cooling control output.
If there is a control output 2, the two control outputs are used for heating and cooling.
(It does not matter which output is used for heating and which output is used for cooling.)
B Control
If PID control is used, you can set PID control separately for heating and cooling.
This allows you to handle control systems with different heating and cooling response characteristics.
Model
A B C D E F
Meaning
Control outputs
1 and 2
No. of
auxiliary
outputs
Power
supply
voltage
Terminal
type
Input
type Options
E5EC 48 × 96 mm
E5AC 96 × 96 mm
Control output 1 Control output 2
RX Relay output None
QX Voltage output
(for driving SSR) None
*2CX Linear current output None
QQ Voltage output
(for driving SSR)
Voltage output
(for driving SSR)
QR Voltage output
(for driving SSR) Relay output
RR Relay output Relay output
*2CC Linear current output Linear current
output
*2CQ Linear current output Voltage output
(for driving SSR)
PR Position-proportional relay output
Position-
proportional relay
output
*344 (auxiliary outputs 1 and 2 with same common and
auxiliary outputs 3 and 4 with same common)
A 100 to 240 VAC
D 24 VAC/DC
5 Screw terminal blocks (with cover)
Control outputs 1 and 2 M Universal input
Option
selection
conditions
*1
For RX,
QX, QQ,
QR, RR, or
CQ
For CX or
CC For PR
HB alarm
and
HS alarm
Communications
Event
inputs
Remote
SP Input
Transfer
output
Selectable Selectable Selectable 000 --- --- --- --- ---
Selectable Selectable 004 --- RS-485 2 --- ---
Selectable 005 --- --- 4 --- ---
Selectable 009
2
(for 3-phase
heaters)
RS-485 2 --- ---
Selectable 010 1 --- 4 --- ---
Selectable 011 1 --- 6 Provided. Provided.
Selectable 013 --- --- 6 Provided. Provided.
Selectable Selectable 014 --- RS-485 4 Provided. Provided.
E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC
42
Model Number Legend
Models with Push-In Plus Terminal Blocks
E5EC-@@ @ @ BM-@@@ (Example: E5EC-RX4ABM-000)
−− −−− −
−−−
ABCDEF
*1. Option 004 and 014 cannot be selected if RX or QX is selected for the control output.
*2. Option 008, 010 and 011 cannot be selected if CX is selected for the control output.
*3. The control output cannot be used as a simple transfer output.
Heating and Cooling Control
Using Heating and Cooling Control
A Control Output Assignment
An auxiliary output is used as the cooling control output.
B Control
If PID control is used, you can set PID control separately for heating and cooling.
This allows you to handle control systems with different heating and cooling response characteristics.
Model
A B C D E F
Meaning
Control
outputs
1 and 2
No. of
auxiliary
outputs
Power
supply
voltage
Terminal
type Input type Options
E5EC 48 × 96 mm
Control output 1 Control output 2
*1RX Relay output None
*2QX Voltage output
(for driving SSR) None
*2CX Linear current output *3 None
22 independent points
44 (auxiliary outputs 1 and 2 with same common and auxiliary
outputs 3 and 4 with same common)
A 100 to 240 VAC
D 24 VAC/DC
B Push-in plus terminal blocks
M Universal input
HB alarm
and
HS alarm
Communications
Event
inputs
Remote
SP Input
Transfer
output
000 --- --- --- --- ---
*1004 --- RS-485 2 --- ---
*2008 1 RS-485 2 --- ---
*2010 1 --- 4 --- ---
*2011 1 --- 6 Provided. Provided.
*1014 --- RS-485 4 Provided. Provided.
E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC
43
Optional Products (Order Separately)
USB-Serial Conversion Cable
Communications Conversion Cable
Note: Always use this product together with the E58-CIFQ2.
This Cable is used to connect to the front-panel Setup Tool
port.
Terminal Covers (for E5EC/E5AC)
Note: The Terminal Covers E53-COV24 are provided with the Digital
Temperature Controller.
Waterproof Packing
Note: This Waterproof Packing is provided with the Digital
Temperature Controller.
Waterproof Cover
Front Port Cover
Note: This Front Port Cover is provided with the Digital Temperature
Controller.
Mounting Adapter
Note: This Mounting Adapter is provided with the Digital Temperature
Controller.
Current Transformers (CTs)
*Lead wires are included with these CTs. If UL certification is
required, use these CTs.
CX-Thermo Support Software
Note: CX-Thermo version 4.5 or higher is required for the E5EC/
E5AC.
CX-Thermo version 4.65 or higher is required for the E5EC-B.
CX-Thermo version 4.67 or higher is required for the E5CC-B
linear current output type.
For the system requirements for the CX-Thermo, refer to
information on the EST2-2C-MV4 on the OMRON website
(www.ia.omron.com).
Model
E58-CIFQ2
Model
E58-CIFQ2-E
Model
E53-COV24 (3pcs)
Applicable Controller Model
E5EC/E5EC-B Y92S-P9
E5AC Y92S-P10
Applicable Controller Model
E5EC/E5EC-B Y92A-49N
E5AC Y92A-96N
Model
Y92S-P7
Model
Y92F-51 (2pcs)
Hole diameter Model
5.8 mm E54-CT1
5.8 mm E54-CT1L *
12.0 mm E54-CT3
12.0 mm E54-CT3L *
Model
EST2-2C-MV4
E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC
44
Specifications
Ratings
*This function is not supported by the E5EC-B. Refer to Model Number Legend on page 42.
Power supply voltage A in model number: 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
D in model number: 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz; 24 VDC
Operating voltage range 85 to 110% of rated supply voltage
Power consumption
E5EC/
E5EC-B
Models with option selection of 000: 6.6 VA max. at 100 to 240 VAC, and 4.1 VA max. at 24 VAC or
2.3 W max. at 24 VDC
All other models: 8.3 VA max. at 100 to 240 VAC, and 5.5 VA max. at 24 VAC or 3.2 W max. at 24 VDC
E5AC
Models with option selection of 000: 7.0 VA max. at 100 to 240 VAC, and 4.2 VA max. at 24 VAC or
2.4 W max. at 24 VDC
All other models: 9.0 VA max. at 100 to 240 VAC, and 5.6 VA max. at 24 VAC or 3.4 W max. at 24 VDC
Sensor input
Temperature input
Thermocouple: K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B, C/W, or PL II
Platinum resistance thermometer: Pt100 or JPt100
Infrared temperature sensor (ES1B): 10 to 70°C, 60 to 120°C, 115 to 165°C, or 140 to 260°C
Analog input
Current input: 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA
Voltage input: 1 to 5 V, 0 to 5 V, or 0 to 10 V
Input impedance Current input: 150 Ω max., Voltage input: 1 MΩ min.
(Use a 1:1 connection when connecting the ES2-HB-N/THB-N.)
Control method ON/OFF or 2-PID control (with auto-tuning)
Control
output
Relay output SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 5 A (resistive load), electrical life: 100,000 operations,
minimum applicable load: 5 V, 10 mA (reference value)
Voltage output
(for driving SSR)
Output voltage: 12 VDC ±20% (PNP), max. load current: 40 mA, with short-circuit protection circuit
(The maximum load current is 21 mA for models with two control outputs.)
Linear current output 4 to 20 mA DC/0 to 20 mA DC, load: 500 Ω max., resolution: approx. 10,000
Auxiliary
output
Number of outputs E5EC/E5AC: 4
E5EC-B: 2 or 4 (depends on model)
Output specifications
SPST-NO. relay outputs, 250 VAC, Models with 2 outputs: 3 A (resistive load),
Models with 4 outputs: 2 A (resistive load),
Electrical life: 100,000 operations, Minimum applicable load: 10 mA at 5 V (reference value)
Event input
Number of inputs 2, 4 or 6 (depends on model)
External contact input
specifications
Contact input: ON: 1 kΩ max., OFF: 100 kΩ min.
Non-contact input: ON: Residual voltage: 1.5 V max., OFF: Leakage current: 0.1 mA max.
Current flow: Approx. 7 mA per contact
Transfer
output
Number of outputs 1 (only on models with a transfer output)
Output specifications Current output: 4 to 20 mA DC, Load: 500 Ω max., Resolution: Approx. 10,000
Linear voltage output: 1 to 5 VDC, load: 1 kΩ min., Resolution: Approx. 10,000
Remote SP input Current input: 4 to 20 mA DC or 0 to 20 mA DC (input impedance: 150 Ω max.)
Voltage input: 1 to 5 V, 0 to 5 V, or 0 to 10 V (input impedance: 1 MΩ min.)
Potentiometer input *100 Ω to 10 kΩ
Setting method Digital setting using front panel keys
Indication method
11-segment digital display and individual indicators
Character height: E5EC/E5EC-B: PV: 18.0 mm, SV: 11.0 mm, MV: 7.8 mm
E5AC: PV: 25.0 mm, SV: 15.0 mm, MV: 9.5 mm
Three displays Contents: PV/SV/MV, PV/SV/Multi-SP, or PV/SV/Remaining soak time, etc
Numbers of digits: 4 digits each for PM, SV, and MV displays
Multi SP Up to eight set points (SP0 to SP7) can be saved and selected using the event inputs, key operations,
or serial communications.
Bank switching None
Other functions
Manual output, heating/cooling control, loop burnout alarm, SP ramp, other alarm functions, heater
burnout (HB) alarm (including SSR failure (HS) alarm), 40% AT, 100% AT, MV limiter, input digital
filter, self tuning, robust tuning, PV input shift, run/stop, protection functions, extraction of square root,
MV change rate limit, logic operations, temperature status display, simple programming, moving
average of input value, and display brightness setting
Ambient operating temperature −10 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing), For 3-year warranty: −10 to 50°C with standard mounting
(with no condensation or icing)
Ambient operating humidity 25 to 85%
Storage temperature -25 to 65°C (with no condensation or icing)
Altitude 2,000 m max.
Recommended fuse T2A, 250 VAC, time-lag, low-breaking capacity
Installation environment Overvoltage category II, Pollution Degree 2 (EN/IEC/UL 61010-1)
E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC
45
Input Ranges
Thermocouple/Platinum Resistance Thermometer (Universal inputs)
Shaded settings are the default settings.
The applicable standards for the input types are as follows:
K, J, T, E, N, R, S, B: JIS C 1602-2015, IEC 60584-1 JPt100: JIS C 1604-1989, JIS C 1606-1989
L: Fe-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985 Pt100: JIS C 1604-1997, IEC 60751
U: Cu-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985 PL II: According to Platinel II electromotive force charts from BASF (previously Engelhard)
C/W: W5Re/W26Re, JIS C 1602-2015, ASTM E988-1990
Analog input
Sensor
type
Platinum resistance
thermometer Thermocouple Infrared temperature
sensor
Sensor
specification
Pt100 JPt100 K J T E L U N R S B
C/W PLII
10 to
70°C
60 to
120°C
115 to
165°C
140 to
260°C
2300
1800
1700
1600
1500
1400
1300
1200
1100
1000
900
800
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
-100
-200
2300
1800
1700 1700
1300 1300 1300
850 850 850
600
500.0 500.0 500.0
400.0 400 400.0 400 400.0
260
120 165
100.0 100.0 90
100
0.0 0.0 00 000000
-20.0 -100 -20.0 -100
-200 -199.9 -199.9 -200 -200 -199.9 -200 -200 -199.9 -200
Set value 0123456789101112131415161718192021222324
Input type Current Voltage
Input
specification
4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA
1 to 5 V 0 to 5 V 0 to 10 V
Setting range
Usable in the following ranges by scaling:
-1999 to 9999, -199.9 to 999.9,
-19.99 to 99.99 or -1.999 to 9.999
Set value 25 26 27 28 29
Temperature range (°C)
E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC
46
Alarm Types
Each alarm can be independently set to one of the following 19 alarm types. The default is 2: Upper limit. (see note.)
Auxiliary outputs are allocated for alarms. ON delays and OFF delays (0 to 999 s) can also be specified.
Note:
In the default settings for models with HB or HS alarms, alarm 1 is set to a heater alarm (HA) and the Alarm Type 1 parameter is not displayed.
To use alarm 1, set the output assignment to alarm 1.
Set
value
Alarm type
Alarm output operation
Description of function
When alarm value X
is positive
When alarm value X
is negative
0 Alarm function OFF Output OFF No alarm
1 Upper- and lower-limit *1*2
Set the upward deviation in the set point for the alarm upper
limit (H) and the lower deviation in the set point for the alarm
lower limit (L). The alarm is ON when the PV is outside this
deviation range.
2
(default) Upper-limit
Set the upward deviation in the set point by setting the alarm
value (X). The alarm is ON when the PV is higher than the
SP by the deviation or more.
3 Lower-limit
Set the downward deviation in the set point by setting the
alarm value (X). The alarm is ON when the PV is lower than
the SP by the deviation or more.
4Upper- and lower-limit
range *1*3
Set the upward deviation in the set point for the alarm upper
limit (H) and the lower deviation in the set point for the alarm
lower limit (L). The alarm is ON when the PV is inside this
deviation range.
5
Upper- and lower-limit with
standby sequence
*
1
*4A standby sequence is added to the upper- and lower-limit
alarm (1). *6
6Upper-limit with standby
sequence A standby sequence is added to the upper-limit alarm (2). *6
7Lower-limit with standby
sequence A standby sequence is added to the lower-limit alarm (3). *6
8Absolute-value upper-
limit
The alarm will turn ON if the process value is larger than the
alarm value (X) regardless of the set point.
9 Absolute-value lower-limit The alarm will turn ON if the process value is smaller than the
alarm value (X) regardless of the set point.
10
Absolute-value upper-
limit with standby
sequence
A standby sequence is added to the absolute-value upper-
limit alarm (8). *6
11 Absolute-value lower-limit
with standby sequence
A standby sequence is added to the absolute-value lower-
limit alarm (9). *6
12
LBA (alarm 1 type only)
-*7
13 PV change rate alarm - *8
14 SP absolute-value
upper-limit alarm
This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the set point (SP)
is higher than the alarm value (X).
15 SP absolute-value
lower-limit alarm
This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the set point (SP)
is lower than the alarm value (X).
16 MV absolute-value
upper-limit alarm *9
Standard Control Standard Control
This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the manipulated
variable (MV) is higher than the alarm value (X).
Heating/Cooling
Control (Heating MV) Heating/Cooling
Control (Heating MV)
Always ON
17 MV absolute-value
lower-limit alarm *9
Standard Control Standard Control
This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the manipulated
variable (MV) is lower than the alarm value (X).
Heating/Cooling
Control (Cooling MV) Heating/Cooling
Control (Cooling MV)
Always ON
18 RSP absolute-value
upper-limit alarm *10
This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the remote SP
(RSP) is higher than the alarm value (X).
19 RSP absolute-value
lower-limit alarm *10
This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the remote SP
(RSP) is lower than the alarm value (X).
ON
OFF PV
SP
LH
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
SP
LH
ON
OFF PV
SP
LH
ON
OFF PV
*
5
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF SP
0
X
ON
OFF SP
0
X
ON
OFF SP
0
X
ON
OFF SP
0
X
ON
OFF MV
0
X
ON
OFF MV
0
X
ON
OFF MV
0
X
ON
OFF MV
0
X
ON
OFF MV
0
X
ON
OFF MV
0
X
ON
OFF RSP 0
X
ON
OFF RSP
0
X
ON
OFF RSP 0
X
ON
OFF RSP
E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC
47
*1. With set values 1, 4 and 5, the upper and lower limit values can
be set independently for each alarm type, and are expressed as
“L” and “H.”
*2. Set value: 1, Upper- and lower-limit alarm
*3. Set value: 4, Upper- and lower-limit range
*4. Set value: 5, Upper- and lower-limit with standby sequence
For Upper- and Lower-Limit Alarm Described Above *2
• Case 1 and 2
Always OFF when the upper-limit and lower-limit hysteresis overlaps.
• Case 3: Always OFF
*5. Set value: 5, Upper- and lower-limit with standby sequence
Always OFF when the upper-limit and lower-limit hysteresis
overlaps.
*6. Refer to the E5
@
C Digital Temperature Controllers User's Manual
(Cat. No. H174) for information on the operation of the standby
sequence.
*7. Refer to the E5
@
C Digital Temperature Controllers User's Manual
(Cat. No. H174) for information on the loop burnout alarm (LBA).
This setting cannot be used with a position-proportional model.
*8. Refer to the E5
@
C Digital Temperature Controllers User's Manual
(Cat. No. H174) for information on the PV change rate alarm.
*9. When heating/cooling control is performed, the MV absolute
upper limit alarm functions only for the heating operation and the
MV absolute lower limit alarm functions only for the cooling
operation.
*10.This value is displayed only when a remote SP input is used. It
functions in both Local SP Mode and Remote SP Mode.
LHSP
Case 1
LHSP
Case 2
LHSP
LHSP
LHSP
Case 3 (Always ON)
H<0, L<0
H<0, L>0
|H| ≥ |L|
H>0, L<0
|H| ≤ |L|
H<0, L>0
|H| < |L|
H>0, L<0
|H| > |L|
LHSP
Case 1
LHSP
Case 2
LHSP
L
L
HSP
HSP
Case 3 (Always OFF)
H<0, L>0
|H| < |L|
H>0, L<0
|H| > |L|
H<0, L<0
H<0, L>0
|H| ≥ |L|
H>0, L<0
|H| ≤ |L|
E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC
48
Characteristics
*1.
The indication accuracy of K thermocouples in the -200 to 1,300°C range, T and N thermocouples at a temperature of -100°C max., and U and L
thermocouples at any temperatures is
±
2°C
±
1 digit max. The indication accuracy of the B thermocouple at a temperature of 400°C max.
is not specified. The indication accuracy of B thermocouples at a temperature of 400 to 800°C is
±
3°C max. The indication accuracy of the R and
S thermocouples at a temperature of 200°C max. is
±
3°C
±
1 digit max. The indication accuracy of C/W thermocouples is (
±
0.3% of PV or
±
3
°
C,
whichever is greater)
±
1 digit max. The indication accuracy of PL II thermocouples is (
±
0.3% of PV or
±
2°C, whichever is greater)
±
1 digit max.
*2. Ambient temperature: -10°C to 23°C to 55°C, Voltage range: -15% to 10% of rated voltage
*3. K thermocouple at -100°C max.: ±10°C max.
*4. The unit is determined by the setting of the Integral/Derivative Time Unit parameter.
*5. External communications (RS-485) and USB-serial conversion cable communications can be used at the same time.
*6. Refer to your OMRON website for the most recent information on applicable models.
*7. Refer to information on maritime standards in Shipping Standards on page 124 for compliance with Lloyd's Standards.
*8. Industrial electromagnetic environment (EN/IEC 61326-1 Table 2)
*9. CX-Thermo version 4.67 or higher is required for the E5CC-B linear current output type.
Indication accuracy
(at the ambient temperature of
23°C)
Thermocouple: (±0.3% of indication value or ±1°C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max. *1
Platinum resistance thermometer: (
±
0.2% of indication value or
±
0.8°C, whichever is greater)
±
1 digit max.
Analog input: ±0.2% FS ±1 digit max.
CT input: ±5% FS ±1 digit max.
Potentiometer input: ±5% FS ±1 digit max.
Transfer output accuracy ±0.3% FS max.
Remote SP Input Type ±0.2% FS ±1 digit max.
Influence of temperature *2
Thermocouple input (R, S, B, C/W, PL II): (
±
1% of indication value or
±
10°C, whichever is greater)
±
1 digit max.
Other thermocouple input: (±1% of indication value or ±4°C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max. *3
Platinum resistance thermometer: (±1% of indication value or ±2°C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max.
Analog input: ±1%FS ±1 digit max.
CT input: ±5% FS ±1 digit max.
Remote SP input: ±1% FS ±1 digit max.
Influence of voltage *2
Influence of EMS.
(at EN 61326-1)
Input sampling period 50ms
Hysteresis Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9°C or °F (in units of 0.1°C or°F)
Analog input: 0.01% to 99.99% FS (in units of 0.01% FS)
Proportional band (P) Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9°C or °F (in units of 0.1°C or °F)
Analog input: 0.1 to 999.9% FS (in units of 0.1% FS)
Integral time (I)
Standard, heating/cooling, or Position-proportional (Close): 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s)
Position-proportional (Floating): 1 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.1 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s)*4
Derivative time (D) 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *4
Proportional band (P) for cooling Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9°C or °F (in units of 0.1°C or °F)
Analog input: 0.1 to 999.9% FS (in units of 0.1% FS)
Integral time (I) for cooling 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *4
Derivative time (D) for cooling 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *4
Control period 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1 to 99 s (in units of 1 s)
Manual reset value 0.0 to 100.0% (in units of 0.1%)
Alarm setting range -1999 to 9999 (decimal point position depends on input type)
Influence of signal source
resistance
Thermocouple: 0.1°C/Ω max. (100 Ω max.)
Platinum resistance thermometer: 0.1°C/Ω max. (10 Ω max.)
Insulation resistance 20 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC)
Dielectric strength 3,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of different charge
Vibration Malfunction 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s2 for 10 min each in X, Y, and Z directions
Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s2 for 2 hrs each in X, Y, and Z directions
Shock Malfunction 100 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions
Resistance 300 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions
Weight E5EC/E5EC-B: Controller: Approx. 210 g, Mounting Adapter: Approx. 4 g × 2
E5AC: Controller: Approx. 250 g, Mounting Adapter: Approx. 4 g × 2
Degree of protection Front panel: IP66, Rear case: IP20, Terminals: IP00
Memory protection Non-volatile memory (number of writes: 1,000,000 times)
Setup Tool E5EC/E5AC: CX-Thermo version 4.5 or higher
E5EC-B: CX-Thermo version 4.65 or higher *9
Setup Tool port
E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC top panel: An E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is used to connect to a
USB port on the computer.*5
E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC front panel:
An E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable and E58-CIFQ2-E Conversion
Cable are used together to connect to a USB port on the computer.
*
5
Standards Approved standards cULus: UL 61010-1/CSA C22.2 No.61010-1, Korean wireless regulations (Radio law: KC Mark) (Some
models only.) *
6
, Lloyd's standards *7, EAC
Conformed standards EN 61010-1 (IEC 61010-1), RCM
EMC
EMI EN 61326-1 *8
Radiated Interference Electromagnetic Field Strength: EN 55011 Group 1, class A
Noise Terminal Voltage: EN 55011 Group 1, class A
EMS: EN 61326-1 *8
ESD Immunity: EN 61000-4-2
Electromagnetic Field Immunity: EN 61000-4-3
Burst Noise Immunity: EN 61000-4-4
Conducted Disturbance Immunity: EN 61000-4-6
Surge Immunity: EN 61000-4-5
Voltage Dip/Interrupting Immunity: EN 61000-4-11
E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC
49
USB-Serial Conversion Cable
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and or other countries.
*1. CX-Thermo version 4.65 or higher runs on Windows 10.
*2. Use a high-power port for the USB port.
*3. CX-Thermo version 4.67 or higher is required for the E5CC-B
linear current output type.
Note:
A driver must be installed on the computer. Refer to the
Instruction
Manual
included with the Cable for the installation procedure.
Communications Specifications
*The baud rate, data bit length, stop bit length, and vertical parity can
be individually set using the Communications Setting Level.
Communications Functions
MELSEC is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
KEYENCE is a registered trademark of Keyence Corporation.
*1. A Temperature Controller with version 1.1 or higher is required.
A Temperature Controller with version 2.1 or higher is required for
the FX Series or the KV Series.
*2. Both the programless communications and the component
communications support the copying.
Current Transformer (Order Separately) Ratings
Heater Burnout Alarms and SSR Failure Alarms
*1. For heater burnout alarms, the heater current will be measured
when the control output is ON, and the output will turn ON if the
heater current is lower than the set value (i.e., heater burnout
detection current value).
*2.
For SSR failure alarms, the heater current will be measured when the
control output is OFF, and the output will turn ON if the heater current
is higher than the set value (i.e., SSR failure detection current value).
*3. The value is 30 ms for a control period of 0.1 s or 0.2 s.
*4. The value is 35 ms for a control period of 0.1 s or 0.2 s.
Electrical Life Expectancy Curve for
Control Output Relays (Reference Values)
Applicable OS Windows XP/Vista/7/8/10 *1
Applicable software
E5EC/E5AC:CX-Thermo version 4.5 or higher
E5EC-B:CX-Thermo version 4.65 or higher
*
3
Applicable models
E5
@
C-T Series, E5
@
C Series, and E5CB Series
USB interface standard
Conforms to USB Specification 2.0.
DTE speed 38,400 bps
Connector
specifications
Computer: USB (type A plug)
Digital Temperature Controller:
Special serial connector
Power supply
Bus power (Supplied from USB host controller.)
*
2
Power supply voltage
5 VDC
Current consumption
450 mA max.
Output voltage
4.7±0.2 VDC
(Supplied from USB-Serial Conversion Cable
to the Digital Temperature Controller.)
Output current
250 mA max.
(Supplied from USB-Serial Conversion Cable
to the Digital Temperature Controller.)
Ambient operating
temperature 0 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing)
Ambient operating
humidity 10% to 80%
Storage temperature -20 to 60°C (with no condensation or icing)
Storage humidity 10% to 80%
Altitude 2,000 m max.
Weight
Approx. 120 g
Transmission line
connection method RS-485: Multidrop
Communications RS-485 (two-wire, half duplex)
Synchronization method
Start-stop synchronization
Protocol CompoWay/F, or Modbus
Baud rate *9600, 19200, 38400, or 57600 bps
Transmission code ASCII
Data bit length *7 or 8 bits
Stop bit length *1 or 2 bits
Error detection
Vertical parity (none, even, odd)
Block check character (BCC) with
CompoWay/F or CRC-16 Modbus
Flow control None
Interface RS-485
Retry function None
Communications buffer
217 bytes
Communications
response wait time
0 to 99 ms
Default: 20 ms
Programless
communications *1
You can use the memory in the PLC to read and write
E5
@
C parameters, start and stop operation, etc. The
E5
@
C automatically performs communications with
PLCs. No communications programming is required
.
Number of connected Digital Temperature Controllers:
32 max. (Up to 16 for the FX Series)
Applicable PLCs
OMRON PLCs
CS Series, CJ Series, CP Series,
NJ Series, or NX1P
Mitsubishi Electric PLCs
MELSEC Q Series, L Series, FX3 Series,
or iQ-R Series
KEYENCE PLCs
KEYENCE KV Series
Component
Communications *1
When Digital Temperature Controllers are
connected, set points and RUN/STOP
commands can be sent from the Digital
Temperature Controller that is set as the
master to the Digital Temperature
Controllers that are set as slaves.
Slope and offsets can be set for the set point.
Number of connected Digital Temperature
Controllers: 32 max. (including master)
Copying *2
When Digital Temperature Controllers are
connected, the parameters can be copied
from the Digital Temperature Controller that is
set as the master to the Digital Temperature
Controllers that are set as slaves.
E54-CT1
E54-CT3
E54-CT1L
E54-CT3L
Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC for 1 min 1,500 VAC for 1 min
Vibration resistance
50 Hz, 98 m/s2
Weight
E54-CT1: Approx. 11.5 g
E54-CT3: Approx. 50 g
E54-CT1L: Approx. 14 g
E54-CT3L: Approx. 57 g
Accessories
E54-CT3 Only
Armatures (2)
Plugs (2)
None
CT input (for heater
current detection)
Models with detection for singlephase
heaters: One input
Models with detection for singlephase or
three-phase heaters: Two inputs
Maximum heater
current 50 A AC
Input current
indication accuracy ±5% FS ±1 digit max.
Heater burnout alarm
setting range
*
1
0.1 to 49.9 A (in units of 0.1 A)
Minimum detection ON time: 100 ms *3
SSR failure alarm
setting range *2
0.1 to 49.9 A (in units of 0.1 A)
Minimum detection OFF time: 100 ms *4
500
300
100
50
30
10
5
3
1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Switching current (A)
E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC
250 VAC, 30 VDC
(resistive load)
cosφ = 1
Life (× 10
4
operations)
E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC
50
External Connections
E5EC/E5AC (Screw Terminal Blocks)
The E5EC is set for a K-type thermocouple (input
type = 5) by default. An input error (s.err) will occur
if the input type setting does not agree with the
temperature sensor. Check the input type.
Relay output
250 VAC, 5 A
(resistive load)
Voltage output
(for driving SSR)
12 VDC, 40 mA
When There Is a
Control Output 2:
21 mA
Linear current output
0 to 20 mA DC
4 to 20 mA DC
Load: 500 Ω max.
100 to 240 VAC 24 VAC/DC
Auxiliary outputs 1, 2, 3, 4
-
+
21
+
++
-
19
20
16
17
18
011
6 event Inputs, 1 CT input,
transfer output, and remote SP input
13
14
15
29
30
31
32
35
36
33
34
28
V
mA
V
I
35
-
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
++
++
013
6 event Inputs, transfer
output, and remote SP input
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
36-
V
mA
V
I
014
Communications, 4 event Inputs,
transfer output, and remote SP input
28
29
30
32
31
33
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
+
-
+
34++35
36-
V
mA
V
I
EV1
EV2
EV1
EV2
EV1
EV2
EV3
EV4
EV3
EV4
EV5
EV6
EV5
EV6
EV5
EV6
B(+)
A(-)
RS-485
CT1
21
19 19
20
20
21
17
19
20
21
16
17
18
13
13
14 14
15 15
16
17
18
15
16
010
4 event inputs
and 1 CT input
009
Communications, 2 event
inputs, and 2 CT inputs
13
14
004
Communications
and 2 event inputs
18
005
4 event inputs
19
20
21
13
14
15
17
18
16
EV1
EV2
EV1
EV2
EV1
EV2
EV1
EV2
EV3
EV4
EV3
EV4
B(+)
A(-)
RS-485
B(+)
A(-)
RS-485
CT1
CT2
COM
CT1
Transfer
output
Remote
SP input
Transfer
output
Transfer
output
Remote
SP input
Remote
SP input
↑
Terminal type
Auxiliary outputs 1, 2, 3, 4
Control output 2
Control output 1
Relay output
Models with 4 auxiliary
outputs: 250 VAC, 2 A
(resistive load)
Relay output
250 VAC, 5 A
(resistive load)
Voltage output
(for driving SSR)
12 VDC, 21 mA
Linear current output
0 to 20 mA DC
4 to 20 mA DC
Load: 500 Ω max.
(1) Control output
Models with
1 Relay Output
Models with 1
Voltage Output
(for Driving SSR)
Models with 2 Voltage
Outputs (for Driving SSR)
Models with Voltage Output (for
Driving SSR) and Relay Output
Models with 2
Relay Outputs
Models with 2
Linear Current
Outputs
Models with 1
Linear Current Output
RX
QR
QX CX
QQ
(2) Auxiliary Outputs
(3) Input Power Supply
(6) Options
(5) Sensor (Temperature/Analog) Input
(no polarity)
E5EC-@@ 4 @ 5 M - @@@
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
RR
7
8
11
12
9
10
CQ
Potentiometer Input
Auxiliary output 2
Auxiliary output 1
Auxiliary output 4
Auxiliary output 3
Models with 2 Outputs: Linear Current Output
and Voltage (for Driving SSR)
↑
Terminal type
E5AC-@@ 4 @ 5 M - @@@
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
23
24
11
12
35
36
19
20
21
22
9
10
31
32
33
34
2
25
7
8
175
6
29
30
3
4
26
27
28
113
14
15
16
18
2
1
2
1
V
-23
V24
+
22
TC
22
+
-
m
A
-
+
23
22
23
24
Pt I
24
22
23
24
-
+
+
++
++
-
-
+
--
--
3
4
5
6
3
4
5
6
3
4
5
6
3
4
5
6
3
4
5
6
3
4
5
6
3
4
5
6
R
R
R
R
Q
Q
Q
Q
OUT1
OUT1
OUT1
C
C
A
B
B
C
OUT1
OUT2
OUT1
OUT2
OUT1
OUT2
OUT1
OUT2
-
+
-
+
3
4
5
6
C
Q
OUT1
OUT2
20
O
21
19
W
C
3
4
5
6
R
R
PR
Open
Close
CC
Models with 2
Position-proportional
Relay Output
Use no-voltage inputs for the event inputs.
The polarity for non-contact inputs is given in parentheses.
(-)
(-)
(-) (-)
(-)
(-)
(-)
(-)
(-)
(-)
(-)
(-) (-) (-)
Note: 1. The application of the terminals depends on the model.
2. Do not wire the terminals that are shown with a gray background.
3. When complying with EMC standards, the cable that connects the
sensor must be 30 m or less. If the cable length exceeds 30 m,
compliance with EMC standards will not be possible.
4. Connect M3 crimped terminals.
5. Due to UL Listing requirements, use the E54-CT1L or E54-CT3L
Current Transformer with the factory wiring (internal wiring).
Use a UL category XOBA or XOBA7 current transformer that is UL
Listed for field wiring (external wiring) and not the factory wiring
(internal wiring).
E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC
51
E5EC-B (Push-In Plus Terminal Blocks)
27
28
26
17
29
30
31
32
19
20
18
21
22
23
24
25
43
44
42
33
45
46
47
48
35
36
34
37
38
39
40
41
-
+
+
011
V
mA
+
-
RX
RQ
OUT1
OUT1
QX
008
5
6
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
32
Pt
A
B
B
+
-
m
A
-
+
31
30
32
31
30
32
31
30
32
31
30
V
-
V
+
TC I
11
12
9
10
2
1
7
8
5
6
3
4
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
38
37
39
40
41
42
43
45
46
47
48
44
18
17
19
20
21
22
23
25
26
24
EV6
EV5
+
+
-
V
I
CT1
EV2
EV1
18
17
19
20
21
22
23
25
26
24
CT1
EV2
EV1
EV4
EV3
18
17
19
20
21
22
23
25
26
24
CT1
EV2
EV1
EV4
EV3
B(+)
A(-)
RS-485
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* *
*
*
*
*
*
↑
Terminal type
E5EC-@@
@
@ B M - @@@
(1)
(2)
(3) (4) (5) (6)
The E5EC is set for a K-type
thermocouple (input type = 5) by
default. An input error (s.err) will
occur if the input type setting does
not agree with the temperature
sensor. Check the input type.
Relay output
250 VAC, 5 A
(resistive load)
Voltage output
(for driving SSR)
12 VDC, 40 mA
Control output 1
Auxiliary outputs 1, 2, 3, 4
Relay output
Model with 2 auxiliary
outputs: 250 VAC, 3 A
(resistive load)
Models with 4 auxiliary
outputs: 250 VAC, 2 A
(resistive load)
(1) Control output
Models with
1 Relay Output
Models with 1
Voltage Output
(for Driving SSR)
100 to 240 VAC 24 VAC/DC
(3) Input Power Supply
(no polarity)
Auxiliary outputs 1, 2, 3, 4Auxiliary outputs 1, 2
(2) Auxiliary Outputs
Auxiliary output 2
Auxiliary output 1
Auxiliary output 4
Auxiliary output 3
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Auxiliary output 1
Auxiliary output 2
(5) Sensor (Temperature/Analog) Input
(6) Options
6 event Inputs, 1 CT input, transfer
output, and remote SP input
Transfer
output
Remote
SP input
4 event inputs and 1 CT input
Communications, 2 event inputs, and 1 CT input
(-)
(-)
(-)
(-)
(-)
(-)
(-)
(-)
(-)
(-)
(-)
(-)
Use no-voltage inputs for the event inputs.
The polarity for non-contact inputs is given in parentheses.
C
OUT1
CX
5
6
Models with 1 linear
current Output
+
−
010
004
18
17
19
20
21
22
23
25
26
24
EV2
EV1
B(+)
A(-)
RS-485
(-)
(-)
014
18
17
19
20
21
22
23
25
26
24
EV2
EV1
B(+)
A(-)
RS-485
(-)
(-)
V
+
+
−I
38
37
39
40
41
42
43
45
46
47
48
44
EV6
EV5
(-)
(-)
-
+
+
V
mA
Communications, 2 event inputs
*
*
*
Communications, 4 event inputs, transfer output, and remote SP input
*
*
*
*
Remote
SP input
Transfer
output
Note: 1. The application of the terminals depends on the model.
2. Do not wire the terminals that are shown with a gray background.
3. When complying with EMC standards, the cable that connects the sensor must be 30 m or less. If the cable length exceeds 30 m,
compliance with EMC standards will not be possible.
4.
Refer to
Wiring Precautions for E5
@
C-B (Controllers with Push-In Plus Terminal Blocks)
on page 133 for wire specifications and wiring methods.
5.
Common terminals are indicated with asterisks (
*
). You can use the input power supply and communications common terminals for crossover wiring.
Do not exceed the maximum number of Temperature Controllers given below if you use crossover wiring for the input power supply.
100 to 240 VAC Controllers: 16 max.
24 VAC/VDC Controllers: 8 max.
6.
Due to UL Listing requirements, use the E54-CT1L or E54-CT3L Current Transformer with the factory wiring (internal wiring).
Use a UL category XOBA or XOBA7 current transformer that is UL Listed for field wiring (external wiring) and not the factory wiring (internal wiring).
1
2
3
4
To another E5@C
Wiring Example:
E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC
52
Isolation/Insulation Block Diagrams
Models with 2 Auxiliary Outputs Models with 4 Auxiliary Outputs
Note: Auxiliary outputs 1 to 2 and 3 to 4 are not insulated.
Nomenclature
Sensor input, CT inputs, and remote SP input
Communications and event inputs
Voltage output (for driving SSR) and transfer output
Relay output
Auxiliary output 1
Auxiliary output 2
: Reinforced insulation
: Functional isolation
Power
Supply
Sensor input, CT inputs, potentiometer input, and remote SP input
Communications and event inputs
Voltage output (for driving SSR),
linear current output, and transfer output
Relay output
Auxiliary outputs 1, 2
Auxiliary outputs 3, 4
: Reinforced insulation
: Functional isolation
Power
Supply
Temperature unit
Front-panel Setup Tool port
Use S Key to change the
digit (default setting).
Use the M Key to change to
another parameter.
No. 1 display
No. 2 display
No. 3 display
PV or specified parameter
SP or specified parameter value
Top View of E5EC Top View of E5EC-B
Use the U D Keys to set
the parameter.
Front panel
Press O Key once to go to Adjustment Level.
Press O Key for at least 3 seconds
to go to Initial Setting Level.
Operation indicators
Manipulated value or other value
Top-panel
Setup
Tool port
E5EC/E5EC-B
Front Panel
Temperature unit
Operation indicators
Press the S Key to change the digit (default setting).
Press the M Key to change to another parameter.
No. 1 display
No. 2 display
No. 3 display
Press the O Key once to go to the Adjustment Level.
Press the O Key for at least 3 seconds to go to the Initial Setting Level.
PV or specified parameter
SP or specified parameter value
Manipulated value or other value
Press the U or D Key to set the parameter.
Top View of E5AC
Front-panel Setup Tool port
Top-panel
Setup
Tool port
E5AC
E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC
53
Dimensions (Unit: mm)
Controllers
1
4
Mounting Adapter
(Accessory, Y92F-51
(also available for
ordering separately))
Waterproof Packing
(Accessory, Y92S-P9
(also available for
ordering separately))
96
48 60 44
91
110
(64)
E5EC
92-0.8
0
92+0.8
0
45+0.6
0
120 min.
(48 × number of units − 2.5)+1.0
0
Group mounting does not
allow waterproofing.
Mounted Separately Group Mounted *
• Recommended panel thickness is 1 to 8 mm.
• Group mounting is not possible in the vertical direction. (Maintain the
specified mounting space between Controllers.)
• To mount the Controller so that it is waterproof, insert the waterproof
packing onto the Controller.
• When two or more Controllers are mounted, make sure that the sur-
rounding temperature does not exceed the allowable operating tem-
perature specified in the specifications.
*E5EC:
Selections for Control Outputs 1 and 2: QQ, QR, RR, CC, PR, or CQ
If you also specify 011, 013, or 014 for the option selection and use
group mounting, the ambient temperature must be 45°C or less.
Maintain the following spacing when more than one Digital
Controller is installed at an ambient temperature of 55°C.
45
-0.6
0
60 min.
120 min.
92
+0.8
0
• Setup Tool ports are provided as standard feature. Use these ports to connect a computer to the Digital Temperature Controller. The E58-
CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is required to connect to the port on the top panel. The E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable and
E58-CIFQ2-E Communications Conversion Cable are required to connect to the port on the front panel. (You cannot leave either port
connected constantly during operation.)
E5EC-B
110
67.4
(71.4)
4
(1)
96
48 44
91
Mounting Adapter
(Accessory, Y92F-51
(also available for
ordering separately))
Waterproof Packing
(Accessory, Y92S-P9
(also available for
ordering separately))
E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC
54
110
96 x 96
60
(64)
4
91
1
Mounting Adapter
(Accessory, Y92F-51
(also available for
ordering separately))
Waterproof Packing
(Accessory, Y92S-P10
(also available for
ordering separately))
91 x 91
92+0.8
0
120 min.
(96 × number of units − 3.5)+1.0
0
Group mounting does not
allow waterproofing.
Mounted Separately Group Mounted
92+0.8
0
92+0.8
0
E5AC
• Recommended panel thickness is 1 to 8 mm.
• Group mounting is not possible in the vertical direction. (Maintain the
specified mounting space between Controllers.)
• To mount the Controller so that it is waterproof, insert the waterproof
packing onto the Controller.
• When two or more Controllers are mounted, make sure that the sur-
rounding temperature does not exceed the allowable operating tem-
perature specified in the specifications.
• Setup Tool ports are provided as standard feature. Use these ports to connect a computer to the
Digital Temperature Controller. The E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is required to
connect to the port on the top panel. The E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable and E58-
CIFQ2-E Communications Conversion Cable are required to connect to the port on the front panel.
(You cannot leave either port connected constantly during operation.)
E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC
55
Accessories (Order Separately)
(2110)
250 263 1510
USB connector
(type A plug) Serial connecto
r
LED (SD)
LED (PWR)
LED (RD)
USB-Serial Conversion Cable
E58-CIFQ2
Connecting to the E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion CableConversion Cable
(1510) 250
(2110)
E58-CIFQ2 (Order Separately) Conversion Cable
263 1510
Note: Always use this product together with the E58-CIFQ2.
Conversion Cable
E58-CIFQ2-E
10
91
2 3.8
Terminal Covers
E53-COV24 (Three Covers provided.)
Waterproof Packing
Y92S-P9 (for DIN 48 × 96)
The Waterproof Packing is provided with the Temperature
Controller.
Order the Waterproof Packing separately if it becomes lost or
damaged.
The degree of protection when the Waterproof Packing is used
is IP66.
Also, keep the Port Cover on the front-panel Setup Tool port
of the E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC securely closed.
To maintain an IP66 degree of protection, the Waterproof
Packing and the Port Cover for the front-panel Setup Tool port
must be periodically replaced because they may deteriorate,
shrink, or harden depending on the operating environment.
The replacement period will vary with the operating
environment.
Check the required period in the actual application.
Use 3 years or sooner as a guideline.
Y92S-P10 (for DIN 96 × 96)
Setup Tool Port Cover for top panel
Y92S-P7
Mounting Adapter
Y92F-51 (Two Adapters provided.)
Order this Port Cover
separately if the Port Cover on
the front-panel Setup Tool port
is lost or damaged. The
Waterproof Packing must be
periodically replaced because
it may deteriorate, shrink, or
harden depending on the
operating environment.
One pair is provided with the
Controller.
Order the Mounting Adapter
separately if it becomes lost
or damaged.
E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC
56
Current Transformers
131.7
115.6 28.9
21.9 (2)
Watertight Cover
Y92A-96N (96 × 96)
Watertight Cover
Y92A-49N (48 × 96)
131.7
67.6 28.9
21.9 (2)
5.8 dia.
Two, 3.5 dia.
30
21
15
25 2.5
40
10.5
2.8
7.5
5
10
Filler
(epoxy)
Case
E54-CT1 Thru-current (Io) vs. Output Voltage (Eo)
(Reference Values)
E54-CT1 or E54-CT1L
Maximum continuous heater current: 50 A (50/60 Hz)
Number of windings: 400±2
Winding resistance: 18±2 Ω
Thru-current (Io) A (r.m.s.)
1 10 100mA 1 10 100
1,000A
100V
Frequency: 50 Hz
Distortion
factor
10%
3%
1%
100Ω
RL=10Ω
∞
10
1
100mV
10
1
100μV
10
1kΩ
Output voltage (Eo) V (r.m.s.)
E54-CT1L
5.8 dia. Filler (epoxy)
Case (PBT)
Shrinkable tube
Two, 3.5 dia.
Cable (AWG18)
25 2.5
115±5
8
21
10.5
40
30
5
15
10
Mark (yellow)
(12)
E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC
57
E54-CT3 Accessories
• Armature
12 dia.
2.36 dia.
Two, M3 (depth: 4)
40 × 40
30
9
30
8
Filler
(epoxy)
Case
(PBT)
15
40
Approx. 3 dia.
18
(22)
Approx. 6 dia.
Plug
Armature
Lead
E54-CT3
Connection Example
•Plug
Thru-current (Io) vs. Output Voltage (Eo)
(Reference Values)
E54-CT3 or E54-CT3L
Maximum continuous heater current: 120 A (50/60 Hz)
(Maximum continuous heater current for an OMRON
Digital Temperature Controller is 50 A.)
Number of windings: 400±2
Winding resistance: 8±0.8 Ω
Thru-current (Io) A (r.m.s.)
1 10 100mA 1 10 100
1,000A
100V
Frequency: 50 Hz
Distortion
factor
10%
3%
1%
1kΩ
100Ω
50Ω
RL=10Ω
500Ω
∞
10
1
100mV
10
1
100μV
10
Output voltage (Eo) V (r.m.s.)
Filler (epoxy)
Case (PBT)
Cable (AWG18)
12.0
dia.
30
40
8
40 15
100±5
8
Two, M3
(depth: 4)
30
E54-CT3L
58
Digital Temperature Controller
E5DC/E5DC-B
(22.5 mm Wide, and DIN Track-mounting Type)
The E5DC Mounts to DIN Track and
Is Ideal for Connections to HMIs and PLCs.
It provides the Same Easy Operation and
Advanced Performance as the Rest of the
E5@C Series.
Models with Push-In Plus Terminal Blocks
Added to Lineup.
• A slim body at 85 × 22.5 mm (D × W) that fits into narrow control
panels and mounts to DIN Track.
• Removable terminal block for easy replacement to simplify maintenance.
• Select from models with screw terminal blocks and models with
Push-In Plus terminal blocks for reduced wiring work.
• No need for power supply and communication line wiring when
using connectors with Push-In Plus terminal blocks.
(Maximum connectable units: 16)
• High-speed sampling at 50 ms for applications with high-speed
temperature increases.
• Easy connections to a PLC with programless communications.
• Set up the Controller without wiring the power supply by connecting to
the computer with a Communications Conversion Cable (sold separately).
Setup is easy with the CX-Thermo (sold separately).
• Models are available with up to 2 auxiliary outputs and 1 event input to complete basic functions.
• A white PV display (height: 8.5 mm) is easy to read when setting up,
checking alarms, and making settings in a control panel.
Main I/O Functions
Refer to Safety Precautions on page 122.
Refer to your OMRON website for the most recent
information on applicable safety standards.
*
22.5 mm Wide, and
DIN Track-mounting Type
Models with Screw
Terminal Blocks
E5DC
22.5 mm Wide, and
DIN Track-mounting Type
Models with Push-In Plus
Terminal Blocks
E5DC-B
*CSA conformance
evaluation by UL.
Event Inputs
<E5DC> <E5DC-B>
• None • None
• 1
Control Output 1
• Relay output
•
Voltage output (for driving SSR)
• Linear current output
Auxiliary Outputs
• None
• 2
Dual displays: PV/SV
4-digit displays
• PF (shift) Key
• Temperature status display
• Simple programming
• Changed parameter display
• Display brightness setting
Serial Communications
• None
• RS-485
E5DC/E5DC-B
• Independent heating and
cooling PID control
Sensor Input
Indication Accuracy
• Thermocouple input: ±0.3% of PV
• Pt input: ±0.2% of PV
• Analog input: ±0.2% of FS
Sampling Period
• 50 ms
Universal input
• Thermocouple
• Pt
• Analog current/voltage
This datasheet is provided as a guideline for selecting products.
Be sure to refer to the following manuals for application precautions and other information required for operation before attempting
to use the product.
E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers User’s Manual (Cat. No. H174)
E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers Communications Manual (Cat. No. H175)
E5DC/E5DC-B
59
Model Number Legend and Standard Models
Model Number Legend
Models with Screw Terminal Blocks
E5DC-@@ @@@M -@@@ (Example: E5DC-RX0ASM-015)
−− −−− −
−−−
A BC DE F
*1. The control output can be used as a simple transfer output for the Digital Temperature Controllers manufactured in July 2014 or later.
*2. Option 000 can be selected only if two auxiliary outputs are selected.
*3. Options 002 and 017 can be selected only if the control output is a relay output or voltage output and two auxiliary outputs are selected.
*4. Option 015 cannot be selected if the control output is a relay output or voltage output and two auxiliary outputs are selected.
*5. Options 016 can be selected only if the control output is a linear current output and two auxiliary outputs are selected.
Heating and Cooling Control
Using Heating and Cooling Control
A Control Output Assignment
An auxiliary output is used as the cooling control output.
B Control
If PID control is used, you can set PID control separately for heating
and cooling.
This allows you to handle control systems with different heating and
cooling response characteristics.
List of Models
Model
A B C D E F
Meaning
Control
outputs 1
and 2
No. of
auxiliary
outputs
Power
supply
voltage
Terminal
type
Input
type Options
E5DC 22.5 mm wide and mounts to DIN Track
Control output 1 Control output 2
RX Relay output None
QX Voltage output
(for driving SSR) None
*1CX Linear current output *1 None
0None
22 (one common)
A100 to 240 VAC
D24 VAC/DC
SScrew terminal blocks (Main Unit and Terminal Unit together)
U Main Unit only (no Terminal Unit)
MUniversal input
HB alarm and HS alarm Communications Event input
*2000 --- --- ---
*3002 1 RS-485 ---
*4015 --- RS-485 ---
*5016 --- --- 1
*3017 1 --- 1
Control output No. of auxiliary
outputs
Options Model Model
HB alarm and HS
alarm No. of event inputs Communications Power supply voltage Power supply voltage
100 to 240 VAC 24 VAC/DC
Relay output
---
---
---
RS-485 E5DC-RX0ASM-015 E5DC-RX0DSM-015
E5DC-RX0AUM-015 E5DC-RX0DUM-015
2
--- E5DC-RX2ASM-000 E5DC-RX2DSM-000
E5DC-RX2AUM-000 E5DC-RX2DUM-000
Detection for single-
phase heater
RS-485 E5DC-RX2ASM-002 E5DC-RX2DSM-002
E5DC-RX2AUM-002 E5DC-RX2DUM-002
1 --- E5DC-RX2ASM-017 E5DC-RX2DSM-017
E5DC-RX2AUM-017 E5DC-RX2DUM-017
Voltage output
(for driving SSR)
---
---
---
RS-485 E5DC-QX0ASM-015 E5DC-QX0DSM-015
E5DC-QX0AUM-015 E5DC-QX0DUM-015
2
--- E5DC-QX2ASM-000 E5DC-QX2DSM-000
E5DC-QX2AUM-000 E5DC-QX2DUM-000
Detection for single-
phase heater
RS-485 E5DC-QX2ASM-002 E5DC-QX2DSM-002
E5DC-QX2AUM-002 E5DC-QX2DUM-002
1 --- E5DC-QX2ASM-017 E5DC-QX2DSM-017
E5DC-QX2AUM-017 E5DC-QX2DUM-017
Linear current
output
---
---
---
RS-485 E5DC-CX0ASM-015 E5DC-CX0DSM-015
E5DC-CX0AUM-015 E5DC-CX0DUM-015
2
--- E5DC-CX2ASM-000 E5DC-CX2DSM-000
E5DC-CX2AUM-000 E5DC-CX2DUM-000
RS-485 E5DC-CX2ASM-015 E5DC-CX2DSM-015
E5DC-CX2AUM-015 E5DC-CX2DUM-015
1 --- E5DC-CX2ASM-016 E5DC-CX2DSM-016
E5DC-CX2AUM-016 E5DC-CX2DUM-016
E5DC/E5DC-B
60
Model Number Legend
Models with Push-In Plus Terminal Blocks
E5DC-@@ @ @ BM-@@@ (Example: E5DC-QX2ABM-002)
−− −−− −
−−−
A BCDE F
*1. The control output can be used as a simple transfer output for the Digital Temperature Controllers manufactured in July 2014 or later.
*2. Option 000 can be selected only if two auxiliary outputs are selected.
*3. Options 002 and 017 can be selected only if the control output is a relay output or voltage output and two auxiliary outputs are selected.
*4. Option 015 cannot be selected if the control output is a relay output or voltage output and two auxiliary outputs are selected.
Heating and Cooling Control
Using Heating and Cooling Control
A Control Output Assignment
An auxiliary output is used as the cooling control output.
B Control
If PID control is used, you can set PID control separately for heating
and cooling.
This allows you to handle control systems with different heating and
cooling response characteristics.
List of Models
Model
A B C D E F
Meaning
Control
outputs 1
and 2
No. of
auxiliary
outputs
Power
supply
voltage
Terminal
type
Input
type Options
E5DC 22.5 mm wide and mounts to DIN Track
Control output 1 Control output 2
RX Relay output None
QX Voltage output
(for driving SSR) None
*1CX Linear current output *1 None
0None
22 (one common)
A100 to 240 VAC
D24 VAC/DC
BPush-In Plus Terminal Blocks
MUniversal input
HB alarm and HS alarm Communications
*2000 --- ---
*3002 1 RS-485
*4015 --- RS-485
Control output No. of auxiliary
outputs
Options Model Model
HB alarm and HS alarm Communications Power supply voltage Power supply voltage
100 to 240 VAC 24 VAC/DC
Relay output 2
--- --- E5DC-RX2ABM-000 E5DC-RX2DBM-000
Detection for single-phase
heater RS-485 E5DC-RX2ABM-002 E5DC-RX2DBM-002
--- --- E5DC-RX0ABM-015 E5DC-RX0DBM-015
Voltage output
(for driving SSR)
2
--- --- E5DC-QX2ABM-000 E5DC-QX2DBM-000
Detection for single-phase
heater RS-485 E5DC-QX2ABM-002 E5DC-QX2DBM-002
--- --- E5DC-QX0ABM-015 E5DC-QX0DBM-015
Linear current
output
2
---
--- E5DC-CX2ABM-000 E5DC-CX2DBM-000
--- RS-485 E5DC-CX0ABM-015 E5DC-CX0DBM-015
2E5DC-CX2ABM-015 E5DC-CX2DBM-015
E5DC/E5DC-B
61
Optional Products (Order Separately)
Terminal Unit
Push-In Plus Terminal Unit
USB-Serial Conversion Cable
Communications Conversion Cable
Note: Always use this product together with the E58-CIFQ2.
This Cable is used to connect to the front-panel Setup Tool
port.
Current Transformers (CTs)
*Lead wires are included with these CTs. If UL certification is required, use
these CTs.
Mounting Adapter
Short Bars (for E5DC)
CX-Thermo Support Software
Note: CX-Thermo version 4.6 or higher is required for the E5DC.
CX-Thermo version 4.69 or higher is required for the E5DC-B.
For the system requirements for the CX-Thermo, refer to
information on the EST2-2C-MV4 on the OMRON website
(www.ia.omron.com).
End Plate
Spacer
DIN Tracks
Unit Labels
End Cover
Connector Cover (for E5DC-B)
Model
E5DC-SCT1S
Model
E5DC-SCT1B
Model
E58-CIFQ2
Model
E58-CIFQ2-E
Hole diameter Model
5.8 mm E54-CT1
5.8 mm E54-CT1L*
12.0 mm E54-CT3
12.0 mm E54-CT3L*
Model
Y92F-53 (2pcs)
Model
Y92S-P11 (4 pcs)
Model
EST2-2C-MV4
Model
PFP-M
Model
PFP-S
Model
PFP-100N
PFP-50N
Model
Y92S-L2
Model
Y92F-54
Model
E53-COV26
E5DC/E5DC-B
62
Specifications
Ratings
*1. This function is not supported by the E5DC-B. Refer to Model Number Legend on page 60.
*2. Only two set points are selectable for event inputs.
*3. Usage is possible for the Digital Temperature Controllers manufactured in July 2014 or later.
Power supply voltage A in model number: 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
D in model number: 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz; 24 VDC
Operating voltage range 85 to 110% of rated supply voltage
Power consumption 4.9 VA max. at 100 to 240 VAC, and 2.8 VA max. at 24 VDC or 1.5 W max. at 24 VDC
Sensor input
Temperature input
Thermocouple: K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B, C/W, or PL II
Platinum resistance thermometer: Pt100 or JPt100
Infrared temperature sensor (ES1B): 10 to 70°C, 60 to 120°C, 115 to 165°C, or 140 to 260°C
Analog input
Current input: 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA
Voltage input: 1 to 5 V, 0 to 5 V, or 0 to 10 V
Input impedance Current input: 150 Ω max., Voltage input: 1 MΩ min.
(Use a 1:1 connection when connecting the ES2-HB-N/THB-N.)
Control method ON/OFF control or 2-PID control (with auto-tuning)
Control
output
Relay output SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load), electrical life: 100,000 operations, minimum applicable load: 5
V, 10 mA (reference value)
Voltage output
(for driving SSR)
Output voltage 12 VDC ±20% (PNP), max. Load current: 21 mA, with short-circuit protection circuit
Linear current output 4 to 20 mA DC/0 to 20 mA DC, load: 500 Ω max., resolution: Approx. 10,000
Auxiliary
output
Number of outputs 2 (depends on model)
Output specifications SPST-NO relay outputs: 250 VAC, 2 A (resistive load),
Electrical life: 100,000 operations, Minimum applicable load: 10 mA at 5 V (reference value)
Event
input *1
Number of inputs 1 (depends on model)
External contact input
specifications
Contact input ON: 1 kΩ max., OFF: 100 kΩ min.
Non-contact input ON: Residual voltage 1.5 V max.; OFF: Leakage current 0.1 mA max.
Current flow: approx. 7 mA per contact
Setting method Digital setting using front panel keys
Indication method 11-segment digital displays and individual indicators
Character height: PV: 8.5 mm, SV: 8.0 mm
Multi SP Up to eight set points (SP0 to SP7) can be saved and selected using the event inputs, key operations, or
serial communications. *2
Bank switching None
Other functions
Manual output, heating/cooling control, loop burnout alarm, SP ramp, other alarm functions, heater
burnout (HB) alarm (including SSR failure (HS) alarm), 40% AT, 100% AT, MV limiter, input digital filter,
self tuning, robust tuning, PV input shift, run/stop, protection functions, extraction of square root, MV
change rate limit, logic operations, temperature status display, simple programming, moving average of
input value, display brightness setting, simple transfer output, *3 and work bit message *3
Ambient operating temperature −10 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing), For 3-year warranty: −10 to 50°C with standard mounting (with
no condensation or icing)
Ambient operating humidity 25 to 85%
Storage temperature −25 to 65°C (with no condensation or icing)
Altitude 2,000 m max.
Recommended fuse T2A, 250 VAC, time-lag, low-breaking capacity
Installation environment Overvoltage category II, Pollution Degree 2 (EN/IEC/UL 61010-1)
E5DC/E5DC-B
63
Input Ranges
Thermocouple/Platinum Resistance Thermometer (Universal inputs)
Shaded settings are the default settings.
The applicable standards for the input types are as follows:
K, J, T, E, N, R, S, B: JIS C 1602-2015, IEC 60584-1 JPt100: JIS C 1604-1989, JIS C 1606-1989
L: Fe-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985 Pt100: JIS C 1604-1997, IEC 60751
U: Cu-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985 PL II: According to Platinel II electromotive force charts from BASF (previously Engelhard)
C/W: W5Re/W26Re, JIS C 1602-2015, ASTM E988-1990
Analog input
Sensor
type
Platinum resistance
thermometer Thermocouple Infrared temperature
sensor
Sensor
specification
Pt100 JPt100 K J T E L U N R S B
C/W
PLII 10 to
70°C
60 to
120°C
115 to
165°C
140 to
260°C
2300
1800
1700
1600
1500
1400
1300
1200
1100
1000
900
800
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
-100
-200
2300
1800
1700 1700
1300 1300 1300
850 850 850
600
500.0 500.0 500.0
400.0 400 400.0 400 400.0
260
120 165
100.0 100.0 90
100
0.0 0.0 00 000000
-20.0 -100 -20.0 -100
-200 -199.9 -199.9 -200 -200 -199.9 -200 -200 -199.9 -200
Set value 0123456789101112131415161718192021222324
Input type Current Voltage
Input specification
4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA
1 to 5 V 0 to 5 V 0 to 10 V
Setting range
Usable in the following ranges by scaling:
-1999 to 9999, -199.9 to 999.9,
-19.99 to 99.99 or -1.999 to 9.999
Set value 25 26 27 28 29
Temperature range (°C)
E5DC/E5DC-B
64
Alarm Types
Each alarm can be independently set to one of the following 17 alarm types. The default is 2: Upper limit. (See note.)
Auxiliary outputs are allocated to alarms. ON delays and OFF delays (0 to 999 s) can also be specified.
Note:
In the default settings for models with HB or HS alarms, alarm 1 is set to a heater alarm (HA) and the Alarm Type 1 parameter is not displayed.
To use alarm 1, set the output assignment to alarm 1.
Set
value
Alarm type
Alarm output operation
Description of function
When alarm value X
is positive
When alarm value X
is negative
0 Alarm function OFF Output OFF No alarm
1 Upper- and lower-limit *1*2
Set the upward deviation in the set point for the alarm upper
limit (H) and the lower deviation in the set point for the alarm
lower limit (L). The alarm is ON when the PV is outside this
deviation range.
2
(default) Upper-limit
Set the upward deviation in the set point by setting the alarm
value (X). The alarm is ON when the PV is higher than the
SP by the deviation or more.
3 Lower-limit
Set the downward deviation in the set point by setting the
alarm value (X). The alarm is ON when the PV is lower than
the SP by the deviation or more.
4Upper- and lower-limit
range *1*3
Set the upward deviation in the set point for the alarm upper
limit (H) and the lower deviation in the set point for the alarm
lower limit (L). The alarm is ON when the PV is inside this
deviation range.
5
Upper- and lower-limit with
standby sequence
*
1
*4A standby sequence is added to the upper- and lower-limit
alarm (1). *6
6Upper-limit with standby
sequence A standby sequence is added to the upper-limit alarm (2). *6
7Lower-limit with standby
sequence A standby sequence is added to the lower-limit alarm (3). *6
8Absolute-value upper-
limit
The alarm will turn ON if the process value is larger than the
alarm value (X) regardless of the set point.
9 Absolute-value lower-limit The alarm will turn ON if the process value is smaller than the
alarm value (X) regardless of the set point.
10
Absolute-value upper-
limit with standby
sequence
A standby sequence is added to the absolute-value upper-
limit alarm (8). *6
11 Absolute-value lower-limit
with standby sequence
A standby sequence is added to the absolute-value lower-
limit alarm (9). *6
12
LBA (alarm 1 type only)
-*7
13 PV change rate alarm - *8
14 SP absolute-value
upper-limit alarm
This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the set point (SP)
is higher than the alarm value (X).
15 SP absolute-value
lower-limit alarm
This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the set point (SP)
is lower than the alarm value (X).
16 MV absolute-value
upper-limit alarm *9
Standard Control Standard Control
This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the manipulated
variable (MV) is higher than the alarm value (X).
Heating/Cooling
Control (Heating MV) Heating/Cooling
Control (Heating MV)
Always ON
17 MV absolute-value
lower-limit alarm *9
Standard Control Standard Control
This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the manipulated
variable (MV) is lower than the alarm value (X).
Heating/Cooling
Control (Cooling MV) Heating/Cooling
Control (Cooling MV)
Always ON
ON
OFF PV
SP
LH
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
SP
LH
ON
OFF PV
SP
LH
ON
OFF PV
*
5
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF SP
0
X
ON
OFF SP
0
X
ON
OFF SP
0
X
ON
OFF SP
0
X
ON
OFF MV
0
X
ON
OFF MV
0
X
ON
OFF MV
0
X
ON
OFF MV
0
X
ON
OFF MV
0
X
ON
OFF MV
E5DC/E5DC-B
65
*1. With set values 1, 4, and 5, the upper- and lower-limit values can
be set independently for each alarm type, and are expressed as
“L” and “H.”
*2. Set value: 1, Upper- and lower-limit alarm
*3. Set value: 4, Upper- and lower-limit range
*4. Set value: 5, Upper- and lower-limit with standby sequence
For Upper- and Lower-Limit Alarm Described Above at *2
• In cases 1 and 2 above, the alarm is always OFF if the upper-
and lower-limit hysteresis overlaps.
• In case 3, the alarm is always OFF.
*5. Set value: 5, Upper- and lower-limit alarm with standby sequence
The alarm is always OFF if upper- and lower-limit hysteresis
overlaps.
*6. Refer to the E5
@
C Digital Temperature Controllers User’s Manual
(Cat. No. H174) for information on the operation of the standby
sequence.
*7. Refer to the E5
@
C Digital Temperature Controllers User’s Manual
(Cat. No. H174) for information on the LBA.
*8. Refer to the E5
@
C Digital Temperature Controllers User’s Manual
(Cat. No. H174) for information on the PV change rate alarm.
*9. When heating/cooling control is performed, the MV absolute-
value upper-limit alarm functions only for the heating operation
and the MV absolute-value lower-limit alarm functions only for the
cooling operation.
LHSP LHSP LHSP
LHSP
LHSP
Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 (Always OFF)
H<0, L>0
|H| < |L|
H>0, L<0
|H| > |L|
H<0, L<0
H<0, L>0
|H| ≥ |L|
H>0, L<0
|H| ≤ |L|
LHSP LHSP LHSP
L
L
HSP
HSP
Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 (Always ON)
H<0, L<0
H<0, L>0
|H| ≥ |L|
H>0, L<0
|H| ≤ |L|
H<0, L>0
|H| < |L|
H>0, L<0
|H| > |L|
E5DC/E5DC-B
66
Characteristics
*1. The indication accuracy of K thermocouples in the −200 to 1,300°C range, T and N thermocouples at a temperature of −100°C max., and U
and L thermocouples at any temperature is ±2°C ±1 digit max. The indication accuracy of B thermocouples at a temperature of 400°C max. is
not specified. The indication accuracy of B thermocouples at a temperature of 400 to 800°C is ±3°C max.
The indication accuracy of R and S thermocouples at a temperature of 200°C max. is ±3°C ±1 digit max. The indication accuracy of C/W
thermocouples is (±0.3% of PV or ±3°C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max.
The indication accuracy of PLII thermocouples is (±0.3% of PV or ±2°C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max.
*2. However, the precision between 0 and 4 mA for a 0 to 20 mA output is ±1% FS max.
*3. Ambient temperature: −10°C to 23°C to 55°C, Voltage range: −15% to 10% of rated voltage
*4. K thermocouple at −100°C max.: ±10°C max.
*5. The unit is determined by the setting of the Integral/Derivative Time Unit parameter.
*6. External serial communications (RS-485) and USB-Serial Conversion Cable communications can be used at the same time.
*7. Refer to your OMRON website for the most recent information on applicable models.
*8. Refer to information on maritime standards in Shipping Standards on page 124 for compliance with Lloyd's Standards.
*9. Industrial electromagnetic environment (EN/IEC 61326-1 Table 2)
Indication accuracy
(when mounted individually,
ambient temperature of 23°C)
Thermocouple: (±0.3 % of indication value or ±1°C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max.*1
Platinum resistance thermometer: (±0.2 % of indication value or ±0.8°C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max.
Analog input:
±
0.2% FS
±
1 digit max.
CT input: ±5% FS ±1 digit max.
Simple transfer output accuracy ±0.3% FS max.*2
Influence of temperature *3
Thermocouple input (R, S, B, C/W, PL II): (
±
1% of indication value or
±
10
°
C, whichever is greater)
±
1 digit max.
Other thermocouple input: (±1% of indication value or ±4°C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max. *4
Platinum resistance thermometer: (±1% of indication value or ±2°C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max.
Analog input: ±1% FS ±1 digit max.
CT input: ±5% FS ±1 digit max.
Influence of voltage *3
Influence of EMS. (at EN 61326-1)
Installation influence (E5DC only) R, S, B, W, or PLII thermocouple: (±1% of PV or ±10°C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max.
Other thermocouple: (±1% of PV or ±4°C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max. *4
Input sampling period 50 ms
Hysteresis Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9°C or °F (in units of 0.1°C or °F)
Analog input: 0.01% to 99.99% FS (in units of 0.01% FS)
Proportional band (P) Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9°C or °F (in units of 0.1°C or °F)
Analog input: 0.1% to 999.9% FS (in units of 0.1% FS)
Integral time (I) 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *5
Derivative time (D) 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *5
Proportional band (P) for cooling Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9°C or °F (in units of 0.1°C or °F)
Analog input: 0.1% to 999.9% FS (in units of 0.1% FS)
Integral time (I) for cooling 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *5
Derivative time (D) for cooling 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *5
Control period 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1 to 99 s (in units of 1 s)
Manual reset value 0.0% to 100.0% (in units of 0.1%)
Alarm setting range −1,999 to 9,999 (decimal point position depends on input type)
Influence of signal source
resistance Thermocouple: 0.1°C/Ω max. (100 Ω max.), Platinum resistance thermometer: 0.1°C/Ω max. (10 Ω max.)
Insulation resistance 20 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC)
Dielectric strength 3,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of different charge
Vibration Malfunction 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s2 for 10 min each in X, Y and Z directions
Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s2 for 2 hr each in X, Y, and Z directions
Shock Malfunction 100 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions
Resistance 300 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions
Weight Main unit: Approx. 80 g, Models with Screw Terminal Unit: Approx. 40 g,
Models with Push-In Plus Terminal Unit: Approx. 40 g
Degree of protection Main unit: IP20, Terminal unit: IP00
Memory protection Non-volatile memory (number of writes: 1,000,000 times)
Setup Tool CX-Thermo version 4.6 or higher
Setup Tool port
E5DC/E5DC-B bottom panel: An E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is used to connect a USB port
on the computer. *6
E5DC/E5DC-B front panel: An E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable and E58-CIFQ2-E Conversion
Cable are used together to connect a USB port on the computer.*6
Standards Approved standards cULus: UL 61010-1/CSA C22.2 No.61010-1, Korean wireless regulations (Radio law: KC Mark) (Some
models only.) *7, Lloyd's standards (E5DC only) *8, EAC
Conformed standards EN 61010-1 (IEC 61010-1), RCM
EMC
EMI: EN61326-1 *9
Radiated Interference Electromagnetic Field Strength: EN55011 Group 1, class A
Noise Terminal Voltage: EN55011 Group 1, class A
EMS: EN61326-1 *9
ESD Immunity: EN61000-4-2
Electromagnetic Field Immunity: EN61000-4-3
Burst Noise Immunity: EN61000-4-4
Conducted Disturbance Immunity: EN61000-4-6
Surge Immunity: EN61000-4-5
Voltage Dip/Interrupting Immunity: EN61000-4-11
E5DC/E5DC-B
67
USB-Serial Conversion Cable
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and or other countries.
*1. CX-Thermo version 4.65 or higher runs on Windows 10.
*2. Use a high-power port for the USB port.
Note:
A driver must be installed on the computer. Refer to the
Instruction
Manual
included with the Cable for the installation procedure.
Communications Specifications
*The baud rate, data bit length, stop bit length, and vertical parity can
be individually set using the Communications Setting Level.
Communications Functions
MELSEC is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
KEYENCE is a registered trademark of Keyence Corporation.
*1. A Temperature Controller with version 2.1 or higher is required for
the FX Series or the KV Series.
*2. Both the programless communications and the component
communications support the copying.
Current Transformer (Order Separately)
Ratings
Heater Burnout Alarms and SSR Failure
Alarms
*1. For heater burnout alarms, the heater current will be measured
when the control output is ON, and the output will turn ON if the
heater current is lower than the set value (i.e., heater burnout
detection current value).
*2. For SSR failure alarms, the heater current will be measured when
the control output is OFF, and the output will turn ON if the heater
current is higher than the set value (i.e., SSR failure detection
current value).
*3. The value is 30 ms for a control period of 0.1 s or 0.2 s.
*4. The value is 35 ms for a control period of 0.1 s or 0.2 s.
Electrical Life Expectancy Curve for
Control Output Relay (Reference Values)
Applicable OS Windows XP/Vista/7/8/10 *1
Applicable software CX-Thermo version 4.6 or higher
Applicable models
E5
@
C-T Series, E5
@
C Series, and E5CB Series
USB interface standard
Conforms to USB Specification 2.0
DTE speed 38,400 bps
Connector
specifications
Computer: USB (Type A plug)
Digital Temperature Controller: Special
serial connector
Power supply
Bus power (Supplied from the USB host controller)
*
2
Power supply voltage
5 VDC
Current consumption
450 mA max.
Output voltage
4.7±0.2 VDC (Supplied from USB-Serial
Conversion Cable to the Digital Temperature
Controller.)
Output current
250 mA max. (Supplied from USB-Serial
Conversion Cable to the Digital Temperature
Controller.)
Ambient operating
temperature 0 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing)
Ambient operating
humidity 10% to 80%
Storage temperature −20 to 60°C (with no condensation or icing)
Storage humidity 10% to 80%
Altitude 2,000 m max.
Weight Approx. 120 g
Transmission line
connection method RS-485: Multidrop
Communications RS-485 (two-wire, half duplex)
Synchronization method Start-stop synchronization
Protocol CompoWay/F, or Modbus
Baud rate *9,600, 19,200, 38,400, or 57,600 bps
Transmission code ASCII
Data bit length *7 or 8 bits
Stop bit length *1 or 2 bits
Error detection
Vertical parity (none, even, odd)
Block check character (BCC)
with CompoWay/F or
CRC-16 with Modbus
Flow control None
Interface RS-485
Retry function None
Communications buffer 217 bytes
Communications
response wait time
0 to 99 ms
Default: 20 ms
Programless
communica-
tions
*1
You can use the memory in the PLC to read and write
E5@C parameters, start and stop operation, etc.
The E5
@
C automatically performs communications with
PLCs. No communications programming is required.
Number of connected Digital Temperature
Controllers: 32 max. (Up to 16 for the FX Series)
Applicable PLCs
OMRON PLCs CS Series, CJ Series, CP
Series, NJ Series, or NX1P
Mitsubishi Electric PLCs
MELSEC Q Series, L Series,
FX3 Series, or iQ-R Series
KEYENCE PLCs KEYENCE KV Series
Component
Communi-
cations
*
1
When Digital Temperature Controllers are connected,
set points and RUN/STOP commands can be sent
from the Digital Temperature Controller that is set as
the master to the Digital Temperature Controllers that
are set as slaves.
Slope and offsets can be set for the set point.
Number of connected Digital Temperature
Controllers: 32 max. (including master)
Copying
*2
When Digital Temperature Controllers are connected,
the parameters can be copied from the Digital
Temperature Controller that is set as the master to the
Digital Temperature Controllers that are set as slaves.
E54-CT1
E54-CT3
E54-CT1L
E54-CT3L
Dielectric strength
1,000 VAC for 1 min 1,500 VAC for 1 min
Vibration resistance
50 Hz, 98 m/s2
Weight
E54-CT1: Approx. 11.5 g
E54-CT3: Approx. 50 g
E54-CT1L: Approx. 14 g
E54-CT3L: Approx. 57 g
Accessories
E54-CT3 Only
Armatures (2)
Plugs (2)
None
CT input (for heater
current detection)
Models with detection for single-phase
heaters: One input
Maximum heater current 50 A AC
Input current
indication accuracy ±5% FS ±1 digit max.
Heater burnout alarm
setting range *1
0.1 to 49.9 A (in units of 0.1 A)
Minimum detection ON time: 100 ms *3
SSR failure alarm setting
range *2
0.1 to 49.9 A (in units of 0.1 A)
Minimum detection OFF time: 100 ms
*
4
500
300
100
50
30
10
5
3
1
0123456
Switching current (A)
E5DC/E5DC-B
250 VAC, 30 VDC
(resistive load)
cosφ = 1
Life (× 104 operations)
E5DC/E5DC-B
68
External Connections
E5DC (Models with Screw Terminal Blocks)
Note: 1. The application of the terminals depends on the model.
2. Do not wire the terminals that are shown with a gray background.
3. When complying with EMC standards, the cable that connects the sensor must be 30 m or less. If the cable length exceeds 30m,
compliance with EMC standards will not be possible.
4. Connect M3 crimped terminals.
5. Due to UL Listing requirements, use the E54-CT1L or E54-CT3L Current Transformer with the factory wiring (internal wiring).
Use a UL category XOBA or XOBA7 current transformer that is UL Listed for field wiring (external wiring) and not the factory wiring
(internal wiring).
6. The terminal layout is different than models with Push-In Plus terminal blocks. Check the terminal arrangement before wiring.
-
+
12
13
14
12
13
14
12
13
14
12
13
14
TC Pt
+
-
m
A
IV
-
V
+
11
10
9
+
-
5
6
5
6
-
5
6
+
RX QX CX
C
Q
R
1
2
3
4
7
8
7
8
7
8
CT1
RS-485
B(+)
A(-)
3
4
RS-485
B(+)
A(-)
EV1
3
4
7
8
CT1
EV1
3
4
A
B
B
1
2
(-)
(-)
1
4
37
814
13
12
2
5
6
9
10
11
(5) Sensor (Temperature/Analog) Input
Auxiliary output 2
Auxiliary output 1
(1) Control Output
1 linear
current output
1 relay
output
1 voltage output
(for driving SSR)
(3) Input Power Supply
(no polarity)
100 to 240 VAC 24 VAC/DC
(2) Auxiliary Outputs
Control output
Relay output
250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load)
Voltage output (for driving SSR)
12 VDC, 21 mA
Linear current output
0 to 20 mA DC
Load: 500 Ω max.
4 to 20 mA DC
Relay outputs
250 VAC: 2 A
(resistive load)
Auxiliary outputs 1, 2
E5DC
017
One event input and 1 CT
016
One event input
015
Communications
002
Communications and 1 CT
(6) Options
The E5DC is set for a K-type thermocouple (input type = 5) by default.
An input error (s.err) will occur if the input type setting does not agree
with the temperature sensor. Check the input type.
MS
Use no-voltage inputs for the event inputs.
The polarity for non-contact inputs is given in parentheses.
* When connecting different potentials to
auxiliary outputs 1 and 2, check the
single fault condition of the common
terminal before use.
(1)
Terminal type
(2)(3)(4)(5) (6)
E5DC/E5DC-B
69
E5DC-B (Models with Push-In Plus Terminal Blocks)
Note: 1. The application of the terminals depends on the model.
2. Do not wire the terminals that are shown with a gray background.
3. When complying with EMC standards, the cable that connects the sensor must be 30 m or less. If the cable length exceeds 30m,
compliance with EMC standards will not be possible.
4. Refer to Wiring Precautions for E5
@
C-B (Controllers with Push-In Plus Terminal Blocks) on page 133 for wire specifications and wiring
methods.
5. Due to UL Listing requirements, use the E54-CT1L or E54-CT3L Current Transformer with the factory wiring (internal wiring).
Use a UL category XOBA or XOBA7 current transformer that is UL Listed for field wiring (external wiring) and not the factory wiring
(internal wiring).
6. The terminal layout is different than models with screw terminal blocks. Check the terminal arrangement before wiring.
7. The event input specification main unit is not used with models with Push-In Plus terminal blocks.
Isolation/Insulation Block Diagrams
E5DC
Note: Auxiliary outputs 1 to 2 are not insulated.
E5DC-B
Note: Auxiliary outputs 1 to 2 are not insulated.
Pt
AB
B
+
-
-
+
11
12
15
16
I
11
12
15
16
mA
V
11
12
15
16
V
9
10
13
14
TC
-
+
11
12
15
16
Control output
Relay output
250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load)
Voltage output (for driving SSR)
12 VDC, 21 mA
Linear current output
0 to 20 mA DC
Load: 500 Ω max.
4 to 20 mA DC
Relay outputs
250 VAC: 2 A
(resistive load)
Auxiliary outputs 1, 2
E5DC MB
1
2
1
2
(3) Input Power Supply
(no polarity)
100 to 240 VAC 24 VAC/DC
RX QX CX
(1) Control Output
(2) Auxiliary Outputs
Auxiliary
output 2
Auxiliary
output 1
(5) Sensor (Temperature/Analog) Input
(6) Options
002
Communications and 1 CT
015
Communications
+-
3
4
3
4-
3
4
+C
Q
R
5
6
7
8
7
8
CT1
RS-485
B(+)
A(-)
5
6
RS-485
B(+)
A(-)
(1) (2)(3)(4)(5) (6)
Terminal type
1
2
5
6
9
10
13
14
3
4
7
812
11 15
16
The E5DC-B is set for a K-type thermocouple (input type = 5) by default.
An input error (s.err) will occur if the input type setting does not agree
with the temperature sensor. Check the input type.
1 relay
output
1 voltage output
(for driving SSR)
1 linear
current output
* When connecting different potentials to
auxiliary outputs 1 and 2, check the
single fault condition of the common
terminal before use.
Sensor input and CT input
Communications and event input
Voltage output (for driving SSR) and linear current output
Relay output
Auxiliary outputs 1 and 2
: Reinforced insulation
: Functional isolation
Power
supply
Sensor input and CT input
Communications
Voltage output (for driving SSR) and linear current output
Relay output
Auxiliary outputs 1 and 2
: Reinforced insulation
: Functional isolation
Power
supply
E5DC/E5DC-B
70
Nomenclature
Front-panel Setup Tool port
Front panel
Bottom View of E5DC/E5DC-B
Operation indicators PV or specified parameter
SP or specified parameter value
No. 1 display
No.2 display
Use the M Key to change to another
parameter.
Use the U D Keys to
set the parameter.
Press O Key for at least 3
seconds to go to Initial
Setting Level.
Use S Key to change the digit (default setting).
Bottom-
panel Setup
Tool port
Press O Key once to go to
Adjustment Level.
E5DC
E5DC-B
E5DC/E5DC-B
71
Dimensions (Unit: mm)
Controllers
22.7+0.3
0
120 min
Mounted Separately Two-Unit Mounting Group Mounted
92 +0.8
0
45 +0.6
0
92 +0.8
092 +0.8
0
(22.5 × number of units) +1.0
0
96
(85)
81
35
22.5 22.5
4
Mounting Adapter
(Y92F-53)(Order separately)
+1.15
-0.2
90
Terminal Unit (E5DC-SCT1S)
110
+1.15
-0.2
4
90
E5DC
• Recommended panel thickness is 1 to 8 mm.
• Group mounting is not possible in the vertical direction. (Maintain the specified mounting space between Controllers.)
• When two or more Digital Temperature Controllers are mounted, make sure that the surrounding temperature does
not exceed the allowable operating temperature specified in the specifications.
The above figure shows the
Terminal Unit attached to
the Main Unit.
486
(90)
110
(6.5)
96
22.5 (6.5)
22.5
+1.15
-0.2
90
+1.15
-0.2
4
35
90
Push-In Plus Terminal Unit
(E5DC-SCT1B)
Mounting Adapter
(Y92F-53)(Order separately)
E5DC-B
The above figure shows the
Push-In Plus Terminal Unit
attached to the Main Unit.
• Setup Tool ports are provided as standard feature. Use these ports to connect a computer to the Digital Temperature
Controller. The E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is required to connect to the port on the bottom panel. The
E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable and E58-CIFQ2-E Communications Conversion Cable are required to con-
nect to the port on the front panel. (You cannot leave either port connected constantly during operation.)
E5DC/E5DC-B
72
Accessories (Order Separately)
22.5
4
35
30.7
+1.15
-0.2
90
Terminal Unit
E5DC-SCT1S
Push-In Plus Terminal Unit
E5DC-SCT1B
22.5
4
35
36.2
+1.15
-0.2
90
(6.5)
(2110)
250 263 1510
USB connector
(type A plug) Serial connector
LED (SD)
LED (PWR)
LED (RD)
USB-Serial Conversion Cable
E58-CIFQ2
Connecting to the E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion CableConversion Cable
(1510) 250
(2110)
E58-CIFQ2 (Order separately) Conversion Cable
263 1510
Conversion Cable
E58-CIFQ2-E
Note: Always use this product together with the E58-CIFQ2.
E5DC/E5DC-B
73
Current Transformers
5.8 dia.
Two, 3.5 dia.
30
21
15
25 2.5
40
10.5
2.8
7.5
5
10
Filler
(epoxy)
Case
E54-CT1 Thru-current (Io) vs. Output Voltage (Eo)
(Reference Values)
E54-CT1 or E54-CT1L
Maximum continuous heater current: 50 A (50/60 Hz)
Number of windings: 400±2
Winding resistance: 18±2 Ω
Thru-current (Io) A (r.m.s.)
1 10 100mA 1 10 100
1,000A
100V
Frequency: 50 Hz
Distortion
factor
10%
3%
1%
100Ω
RL=10Ω
∞
10
1
100mV
10
1
100μV
10
1kΩ
Output voltage (Eo) V (r.m.s.)
E54-CT1L
5.8 dia. Filler (epoxy)
Case (PBT)
Shrinkable tube
Two, 3.5 dia.
Cable (AWG18)
25 2.5
115±5
8
21
10.5
40
30
5
15
10
Mark (yellow)
(12)
E5DC/E5DC-B
74
E54-CT3 Accessories
• Armature
12 dia.
2.36 dia.
Two, M3 (depth: 4)
40 × 40
30
9
30
8
Filler
(epoxy)
Case
(PBT)
15
40
Approx. 3 dia.
18
(22)
Approx. 6 dia.
Plug
Armature
Lead
E54-CT3
Connection Example
•Plug
Thru-current (Io) vs. Output Voltage (Eo)
(Reference Values)
E54-CT3 or E54-CT3L
Maximum continuous heater current: 120 A (50/60 Hz)
(Maximum continuous heater current for an OMRON
Digital Temperature Controller is 50 A.)
Number of windings: 400±2
Winding resistance: 8±0.8 Ω
Thru-current (Io) A (r.m.s.)
1 10 100mA 1 10 100
1,000A
100V
Frequency: 50 Hz
Distortion
factor
10%
3%
1%
1kΩ
100Ω
50Ω
RL=10Ω
500Ω
∞
10
1
100mV
10
1
100μV
10
Output voltage (Eo) V (r.m.s.)
Filler (epoxy)
Case (PBT)
Cable (AWG18)
12.0
dia.
30
40
8
40 15
100±5
8
Two, M3
(depth: 4)
30
E54-CT3L
E5DC/E5DC-B
75
Mounting Adapters
Y92F-53 (Two included.)
Short Bars
Y92S-P11 (Four included.)
End Plate
PFP-M
DIN Tracks
PFP-100N
PFP-50N
Spacer
PFP-S
Unit Labels
Y92S-L2
End Cover
Y92F-54 (Two included.)
12
34.7
11.8 9.4
This accessory is not included with the
product. Order it separately to mount
the product to a panel.
3
2.4
0.8
24.8
27.5
22.5
5
Use this product to connect between terminals (for power supplies,
communications, etc.) when you use multiple E5DC Controllers.
50
11.5
10
M4×8
pan head
screw
M4 spring washer 4.8
1.3
1.8
1
10
6.2 1.8
35.5 35.3
4.5
15
25 25
10 10
1000 (500) *
25 25 15 (5) *
35±0.3
7.3±0.15
27±0.15
1
*Dimensions in parentheses are for the PFP-50N.
5
16
12
44.3
34.8
16.5
The Unit Labels for the Digital Panel
Meter are used. Use either the °C or °F
label from the sheet.
5.3
3.9
68
96
Use the End Cover when you mount the E5DC/E5DC-B to a
panel to hide the gap between the Controller and the panel.
E5DC/E5DC-B
76
Connector Cover
E53-COV26
E5DC-B Push-In Plus Terminal Units are mounted with both a male
and female connector cover (E53-COV26).
Order the connector cover separately if it becomes lost or damaged.
Male connector cover Female connector cover
77
MEMO
78
Programmable Temperature Controller (Digital Controller)
E5CC-T (48 × 48 mm)
Programmable Controllers Join the E5
C Series!
Program up to 256 segments can handle a wide
variety of applications.
• Set up to 8 Programs (Patterns) with 32 Segments (Steps) Each
• The white PV display with a height of 15.2 mm improves visibility.
• High-speed sampling at 50 ms.
• Models are available with up to 3 auxiliary outputs, up to 4 event inputs,
and a transfer output to cover a wide range of applications.
• Short body with depth of only 60 mm.
• Set up the Controller without wiring the power supply by connecting to
the computer with a Communications Conversion Cable (sold
separately). Setup is easy with the CX-Thermo (sold separately).
• Easy connections to a PLC with programless communications. Use
component communications to link Temperature Controllers to each
other.
Main I/O Functions
*
48 × 48 mm
E5CC-T
Refer to Safety Precautions on page 122.
Refer to your OMRON website for the most recent
information on applicable safety standards.
*CSA conformance
evaluation by UL.
Sensor Input
Universal input
• Thermocouple
• Pt
• Analog current/voltage
E5CC-T
Dual displays: PV/SV 4-digit displays
Indication Accuracy
• Thermocouple input: ±0.3%
of PV
• Pt input: ±0.2% of PV
• Analog input: ±0.2% of FS
Sampling Period
• 50 ms
Event Inputs
• None
• 2
• 4
Control Output 1
• Relay output
• Voltage output (for driving
SSR)
• Linear current output
Control Output 2
• None
• Voltage output (for driving
SSR)
Transfer Output
• None
• 1
• PF (shift) Key
• Temperature status display
•
Operating and editing the program
•
Independent heating and cooling
PID control
• Parameter mask setting
• Display brightness setting
Auxiliary Outputs
• 3
Serial Communications
• None
• RS-485
This datasheet is provided as a guideline for selecting products.
Be sure to refer to the following manuals for application precautions and other information required for operation before attempting
to use the product.
E5@C-T Digital Temperature Controllers Programmable Type User’s Manual (Cat. No. H185)
E5@C-T Digital Temperature Controllers Programmable Type Communications Manual (Cat. No. H186)
E5CC-T
79
Model Number Legend and Standard Models
Model Number Legend
Models with Screw Terminal Blocks
E5CC-T @@3@5M-@@@ (Example: E5CC-TRX3A5M-000)
−−−−
−−
−−−
ABCDE F
*1. Options with HB and HS alarms (001 and 003) cannot be selected if a linear current output is selected for the control output.
*2. The linear current output cannot be used as a transfer output.
*3. Option 004 can be selected only when “CX” is selected for the control outputs.
Heating and Cooling Control
Using Heating and Cooling Control
A Control Output Assignment
If there is no control output 2, an auxiliary output is used as the cooling control output.
If there is a control output 2, the two control outputs are used for heating and cooling.
(It does not matter which output is used for heating and which output is used for cooling.)
B Control
If PID control is used, you can set PID control separately for heating and cooling.
This allows you to handle control systems with different heating and cooling response characteristics.
Model
A B C D E F
Meaning
Control outputs
1 and 2
No. of
auxiliary
outputs
Power
supply
voltage
Terminal
type
Input
type Options
E5CC-T 48 × 48 mm Programmable Type
Control output 1 Control output 2
RX Relay output None
QX Voltage output
(for driving SSR) None
*1CX Linear current output *2 None
QQ Voltage output
(for driving SSR)
Voltage output
(for driving SSR)
CQ Linear current output *2Voltage output
(for driving SSR)
33 (one common)
A100 to 240 VAC
D24 VAC/DC
5Screw terminal blocks (with cover)
MUniversal input
HB alarm
and HS
alarm
Communica-
tions
Event
inputs
Transfer
output
000 --- --- --- ---
*1001 1 --- 2 ---
*1003
2 (for 3-
phase
heaters)
RS-485 --- ---
*3004 --- RS-485 2 ---
005 --- --- 4 ---
006 --- --- 2 Provided.
E5CC-T
80
Optional Products (Order Separately)
USB-Serial Conversion Cable
Terminal Covers
Note: The Terminal Covers E53-COV23 are provided with the Digital
Temperature Controller. The E53-COV10 cannot be used.
Refer to page 89 for the mounted dimensions.
Waterproof Packing
Note: The Waterproof Packing is provided with the Digital
Temperature Controller.
Current Transformers (CTs)
*Lead wires are included with these CTs. If UL certification is required, use
these CTs.
Adapter
Note: Use this Adapter when the panel has already been prepared for
an E5B@ Controller.
Waterproof Cover
Mounting Adapter
Note: This Mounting Adapter is provided with the Digital Temperature
Controller.
DIN Track Mounting Adapter
Front Covers
CX-Thermo Support Software
Note: CX-Thermo version 4.61 or higher is required for the E5CC-T.
For the system requirements for the CX-Thermo, refer to
information on the EST2-2C-MV4 on the OMRON website
(www.ia.omron.com).
Model
E58-CIFQ2
Model
E53-COV17
E53-COV23 (3pcs)
Model
Y92S-P8
Hole diameter Model
5.8 mm E54-CT1
5.8 mm E54-CT1L*
12.0 mm E54-CT3
12.0 mm E54-CT3L*
Model
Y92F-45
Model
Y92A-48N
Model
Y92F-49
Model
Y92F-52
Type Model
Hard Front Cover Y92A-48H
Soft Front Cover Y92A-48D
Model
EST2-2C-MV4
E5CC-T
81
Specifications
Ratings
Power supply voltage A in model number: 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
D in model number: 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz; 24 VDC
Operating voltage range 85 to 110% of rated supply voltage
Power consumption 7.5 VA max. at 100 to 240 VAC, and 4.1 VA max. at 24 VAC or 2.3 W max. at 24 VDC
Sensor input
Temperature input
Thermocouple: K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B, C/W, or PL II
Platinum resistance thermometer: Pt100 or JPt100
Infrared temperature sensor (ES1B): 10 to 70°C, 60 to 120°C, 115 to 165°C, or 140 to 260°C
Analog input
Current input: 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA
Voltage input: 1 to 5 V, 0 to 5 V, or 0 to 10 V
Input impedance Current input: 150 Ω max., Voltage input: 1 MΩ min.
(Use a 1:1 connection when connecting the ES2-HB-N/THB-N.)
Control method 2-PID control (with auto-tuning) or ON/OFF control
Control
output
Relay output SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load), electrical life: 100,000 operations, minimum applicable load:
5 V, 10 mA (reference value)
Voltage output
(for driving SSR) Output voltage: 12 VDC ±20% (PNP), max. load current: 21 mA, with short-circuit protection circuit
Linear current output 4 to 20 mA DC/0 to 20 mA DC, load: 500 Ω max., resolution: approx. 10,000
Auxiliary
output
Number of outputs 3
Output specifications SPST-NO relay outputs, 250 VAC, Models with 3 outputs: 2 A (resistive load), Electrical life: 100,000
operations, Minimum applicable load: 10 mA at 5 V (reference value)
Event input
Number of inputs 2 or 4 (depends on model)
External contact input
specifications
Contact input: ON: 1 kΩ max., OFF: 100 kΩ min.
Non-contact input: ON: Residual voltage: 1.5 V max., OFF: Leakage current: 0.1 mA max.
Current flow: Approx. 7 mA per contact
Transfer
output
Number of outputs 1 (only on models with a transfer output)
Output specifications Current output: 4 to 20 mA DC, load: 500 Ω max., resolution: approx. 10,000
Linear voltage output: 1 to 5 VDC, load: 1 kΩ min., resolution: Approx. 10,000
Setting method Digital setting using front panel keys
Indication method 11-segment digital display and individual indicators
Character height: PV: 15.2 mm, SV: 7.1 mm
Bank switching None
Other functions
Manual output, heating/cooling control, loop burnout alarm, other alarm functions, heater burnout (HB)
alarm (including SSR failure (HS) alarm), 40% AT, 100% AT, MV limiter, input digital filter, robust
tuning, PV input shift, protection functions, extraction of square root, MV change rate limit, logic
operations, temperature status display, moving average of input value, and display brightness setting
Ambient operating temperature −10 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing), For 3-year warranty: −10 to 50°C with standard mounting
(with no condensation or icing)
Ambient operating humidity 25 to 85%
Storage temperature −25 to 65°C (with no condensation or icing)
Altitude 2,000 m max.
Recommended fuse T2A, 250 VAC, time-lag, low-breaking capacity
Installation environment Overvoltage category II, Pollution Degree 2 (EN/IEC/UL 61010-1)
E5CC-T
82
Input Ranges
Thermocouple/Platinum Resistance Thermometer (Universal inputs)
Shaded settings are the default settings.
The applicable standards for the input types are as follows:
K, J, T, E, N, R, S, B: JIS C 1602-2015, IEC 60584-1 JPt100: JIS C 1604-1989, JIS C 1606-1989
L: Fe-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985 Pt100: JIS C 1604-1997, IEC 60751
U: Cu-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985 PL II: According to Platinel II electromotive force charts from BASF (previously Engelhard)
C/W: W5Re/W26Re, JIS C 1602-2015, ASTM E988-1990
Analog input
Sensor
type
Platinum resistance
thermometer Thermocouple Infrared temperature
sensor
Sensor
specification
Pt100 JPt100 K J T E L U N R S B
C/W PLII
10 to
70°C
60 to
120°C
115 to
165°C
140 to
260°C
2300
1800
1700
1600
1500
1400
1300
1200
1100
1000
900
800
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
0
-100
-200
2300
1800
1700 1700
1300 1300 1300
850 850 850
600
500.0 500.0 500.0
400.0
400
400.0
400
400.0
260
120 165
100.0 100.0
90
100
0.0 0.0 00 000000
-20.0
-100
-20.0
-100
-200
-199.9 199.9
-200 -200
-199.9
-200 -200
-199.9
-200
Set value 012345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Input type Current Voltage
Input
specification
4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA
1 to 5 V 0 to 5 V 0 to 10 V
Setting range
Usable in the following ranges by scaling:
-1999 to 9999, -199.9 to 999.9,
-19.99 to 99.99 or -1.999 to 9.999
Set value 25 26 27 28 29
Temperature range (°C)
E5CC-T
83
Alarm Types
Each alarm can be independently set to one of the following 17 alarm types. The default is 2: Upper limit. (see note.)
Auxiliary outputs are allocated for alarms. ON delays and OFF delays (0 to 999 s) can also be specified.
Note:
In the default settings for models with HB or HS alarms, alarm 1 is set to a heater alarm (HA) and the Alarm Type 1 parameter is not displayed.
To use alarm 1, set the output assignment to alarm 1.
Set
value
Alarm type
Alarm output operation
Description of function
When alarm value X
is positive
When alarm value X
is negative
0 Alarm function OFF Output OFF No alarm
1 Upper- and lower-limit *1*2
Set the upward deviation in the set point for the alarm upper
limit (H) and the lower deviation in the set point for the alarm
lower limit (L). The alarm is ON when the PV is outside this
deviation range.
2
(default) Upper-limit
Set the upward deviation in the set point by setting the alarm
value (X). The alarm is ON when the PV is higher than the
SP by the deviation or more.
3 Lower-limit
Set the downward deviation in the set point by setting the
alarm value (X). The alarm is ON when the PV is lower than
the SP by the deviation or more.
4Upper- and lower-limit
range *1*3
Set the upward deviation in the set point for the alarm upper
limit (H) and the lower deviation in the set point for the alarm
lower limit (L). The alarm is ON when the PV is inside this
deviation range.
5
Upper- and lower-limit with
standby sequence
*
1
*4A standby sequence is added to the upper- and lower-limit
alarm (1). *6
6Upper-limit with standby
sequence A standby sequence is added to the upper-limit alarm (2). *6
7Lower-limit with standby
sequence A standby sequence is added to the lower-limit alarm (3). *6
8Absolute-value upper-
limit
The alarm will turn ON if the process value is larger than the
alarm value (X) regardless of the set point.
9 Absolute-value lower-limit The alarm will turn ON if the process value is smaller than the
alarm value (X) regardless of the set point.
10
Absolute-value upper-
limit with standby
sequence
A standby sequence is added to the absolute-value upper-
limit alarm (8). *6
11 Absolute-value lower-limit
with standby sequence
A standby sequence is added to the absolute-value lower-
limit alarm (9). *6
12
LBA (alarm 1 type only)
-*7
13 PV change rate alarm - *8
14 SP absolute-value
upper-limit alarm
This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the set point (SP)
is higher than the alarm value (X).
15 SP absolute-value
lower-limit alarm
This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the set point (SP)
is lower than the alarm value (X).
16 MV absolute-value
upper-limit alarm *9
Standard Control Standard Control
This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the manipulated
variable (MV) is higher than the alarm value (X).
Heating/Cooling
Control (Heating MV) Heating/Cooling
Control (Heating MV)
Always ON
17 MV absolute-value
lower-limit alarm *9
Standard Control Standard Control
This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the manipulated
variable (MV) is lower than the alarm value (X).
Heating/Cooling
Control (Cooling MV) Heating/Cooling
Control (Cooling MV)
Always ON
ON
OFF PV
SP
LH
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
SP
LH
ON
OFF PV
SP
LH
ON
OFF PV
*
5
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF SP
0
X
ON
OFF SP
0
X
ON
OFF SP
0
X
ON
OFF SP
0
X
ON
OFF MV
0
X
ON
OFF MV
0
X
ON
OFF MV
0
X
ON
OFF MV
0
X
ON
OFF MV
0
X
ON
OFF MV
E5CC-T
84
*1. With set values 1, 4 and 5, the upper and lower limit values can
be set independently for each alarm type, and are expressed as
“L” and “H.”
*2. Set value: 1, Upper- and lower-limit alarm
*3. Set value: 4, Upper- and lower-limit range
*4. Set value: 5, Upper- and lower-limit with standby sequence
For Upper- and Lower-Limit Alarm Described Above *2
• Case 1 and 2
Always OFF when the upper-limit and lower-limit hysteresis overlaps.
• Case 3: Always OFF
*5. Set value: 5, Upper- and lower-limit with standby sequence
Always OFF when the upper-limit and lower-limit hysteresis
overlaps.
*6. Refer to the E5
@
C-T Digital Temperature Controllers
Programmable Type User's Manual (Cat. No. H185) for
information on the operation of the standby sequence.
*7. Refer to the E5
@
C-T Digital Temperature Controllers
Programmable Type User's Manual (Cat. No. H185) for
information on the loop burnout alarm (LBA).
*8. Refer to the E5
@
C-T Digital Temperature Controllers
Programmable Type User's Manual (Cat. No. H185) for
information on the PV change rate alarm.
*9. When heating/cooling control is performed, the MV absolute
upper limit alarm functions only for the heating operation and the
MV absolute lower limit alarm functions only for the cooling
operation.
LH
H<0, L>0
|H| < |L|
SP
Case 1
LH
H>0, L<0
|H| > |L|
SP
Case 2
LH
H<0, L<0
SP
LH
H<0, L>0
|H| ≥ |L|
SP
LH
H>0, L<0
|H| ≤ |L|
SP
Case 3 (Always ON)
LH
H<0, L>0
|H| < |L|
SP
Case 1
LH
H>0, L<0
|H| > |L|
SP
Case 2
LH
H<0, L<0
SP
L
L
H
H<0, L>0
|H| ≥ |L|
SP
H
H>0, L<0
|H| ≤ |L|
SP
Case 3 (Always OFF)
E5CC-T
85
Characteristics
*1. The indication accuracy of K thermocouples in the −200 to 1300°C range, T and N thermocouples at a temperature of −100°C max., and U
and L thermocouples at any temperatures is ±2°C ±1 digit max. The indication accuracy of the B thermocouple at a temperature of 400°C max.
is not specified. The indication accuracy of B thermocouples at a temperature of 400 to 800°C is ±3°C max. The indication accuracy of the R
and S thermocouples at a temperature of 200°C max. is ±3°C ±1 digit max. The indication accuracy of C/W thermocouples is (±0.3% of PV or
±3°C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max. The indication accuracy of PL II thermocouples is (±0.3% of PV or ±2°C, whichever is greater) ±1
digit max.
*2. Ambient temperature: −10°C to 23°C to 55°C, Voltage range: −15% to 10% of rated voltage
*3. K thermocouple at −100°C max.: ±10°C max.
*4. The unit is determined by the setting of the Integral/Derivative Time Unit parameter.
*5. External communications (RS-485) and USB-serial conversion cable communications can be used at the same time.
*6. Refer to your OMRON website for the most recent information on applicable models.
*7. Industrial electromagnetic environment (EN/IEC 61326-1 Table 2)
Indication accuracy
(at the ambient temperature of 23°C)
Thermocouple: (±0.3% of indication value or ±1°C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max. *1
Platinum resistance thermometer: (
±
0.2% of indication value or
±
0.8°C, whichever is greater)
±
1 digit max.
Analog input:
±
0.2% FS
±
1 digit max.
CT input: ±5% FS ±1 digit max.
Transfer output accuracy ±0.3% FS max.
Influence of temperature *2Thermocouple input (R, S, B, C/W, PL II): (±1% of indication value or ±10°C, whichever is greater)
±1 digit max.
Other thermocouple input: (±1% of indication value or ±4°C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max. *3
Platinum resistance thermometer: (±1% of indication value or ±2°C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max.
Analog input: ±1%FS ±1 digit max.
CT input: ±5% FS ±1 digit max.
Influence of voltage *2
Influence of EMS.
(at EN 61326-1)
Input sampling period 50 ms
Hysteresis Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9°C or °F (in units of 0.1°C or °F)
Analog input: 0.01% to 99.99% FS (in units of 0.01% FS)
Proportional band (P) Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9°C or °F (in units of 0.1°C or °F)
Analog input: 0.1% to 999.9% FS (in units of 0.1% FS)
Integral time (I) 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *4
Derivative time (D) 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *4
Proportional band (P) for cooling Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9°C or °F (in units of 0.1°C or °F)
Analog input: 0.1% to 999.9% FS (in units of 0.1% FS)
Integral time (I) for cooling 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *4
Derivative time (D) for cooling 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *4
Control period 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1 to 99 s (in units of 1 s)
Manual reset value 0.0 to 100.0% (in units of 0.1%)
Alarm setting range -1999 to 9999 (decimal point position depends on input type)
Influence of signal source resistance Thermocouple: 0.1°C/Ω max. (100 Ωmax.)
Platinum resistance thermometer: 0.1°C/Ω max. (10 Ω max.)
Insulation resistance 20 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC)
Dielectric strength 3,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of different charge
Vibration Malfunction 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s2 for 10 min each in X, Y, and Z directions
Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s2 for 2 hrs each in X, Y, and Z directions
Shock Malfunction 100 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions
Resistance 300 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions
Weight Controller: Approx. 120 g, Mounting Adapter: Approx. 10 g
Degree of protection Front panel: IP66, Rear case: IP20, Terminals: IP00
Memory protection Non-volatile memory (number of writes: 1,000,000 times)
Setup Tool CX-Thermo version 4.61 or higher
Setup Tool port E5CC-T top panel: An E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is used to connect to a USB port on
the computer. *5
Standards Approved standards cULus: UL 61010-1/CSA C22.2 No.61010-1, Korean wireless regulations (Radio law: KC Mark) (Some
models only.) *6
Conformed standards EN 61010-1 (IEC 61010-1), RCM
EMC
EMI: EN 61326-1 *7
Radiated Interference Electromagnetic Field Strength: EN 55011 Group 1, class A
Noise Terminal Voltage: EN 55011 Group 1, class A
EMS: EN 61326-1 *7
ESD Immunity: EN 61000-4-2
Electromagnetic Field Immunity: EN 61000-4-3
Burst Noise Immunity: EN 61000-4-4
Conducted Disturbance Immunity: EN 61000-4-6
Surge Immunity: EN 61000-4-5
Voltage Dip/Interrupting Immunity: EN 61000-4-11
E5CC-T
86
Program Control
Number of programs (patterns)
8
Number of segments (steps) 32
Segment setting method Time setting (Segment set with set point and time.)
Slope setting (Segment set with segment type, set point, slope, and time.)
Segment times 0 h 0 min to 99 h 59 min
0 min 0 s to 99 min 59 s
Alarm setting Set separately for each program.
Reset operation Select either stopping control or fixed SP operation.
Startup operation Select continuing, resetting, manual operation, or run mode.
PID sets Number of sets 8
Setting method Set separately for each program (automatic PID group selection also supported).
Alarm SP function Select from ramp SP and target SP.
Program status control Segment operation Advance, segment jump, hold, and wait
Program operation Program repetitions and program links
Wait operation Wait method Waiting at segment ends
Wait width setting Same wait width setting for all programs
Time signals
Number of outputs 2
Number of ON/OFF
Operations 1 each per output
Setting method Set separately for each program.
Program status output Program end output (pulse width can be set), run output, stage output
Program startup operation
PV start Select from segment 1 set point, slope-priority PV start
Standby 0 h 0 min to 99 h 59 min
0 day 0 h to 99 day 23h
Operation end operation Select from resetting, continuing control at final set point, and fixed SP control.
Program SP shift Same program SP shift for all programs
E5CC-T
87
USB-Serial Conversion Cable
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and or other countries.
*1. CX-Thermo version 4.65 or higher runs on Windows 10.
*2. Use a high-power port for the USB port.
Note:
A driver must be installed on the computer. Refer to the
Instruction
Manual
included with the Cable for the installation procedure.
Communications Specifications
*The baud rate, data bit length, stop bit length, and vertical parity can
be individually set using the Communications Setting Level.
Communications Functions
MELSEC is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
*Both the programless communications and the component
communications support the copying.
Current Transformer (Order Separately)
Ratings
Heater Burnout Alarms and SSR Failure
Alarms
*1. For heater burnout alarms, the heater current will be measured
when the control output is ON, and the output will turn ON if the
heater current is lower than the set value (i.e., heater burnout
detection current value).
*2. For SSR failure alarms, the heater current will be measured when
the control output is OFF, and the output will turn ON if the heater
current is higher than the set value (i.e., SSR failure detection
current value).
*3. The value is 30 ms for a control period of 0.1 s or 0.2 s.
*4. The value is 35 ms for a control period of 0.1 s or 0.2 s.
Electrical Life Expectancy Curve for
Relays (Reference Values)
Applicable OS Windows XP/Vista/7/8/10 *1
Applicable software CX-Thermo version 4.61 or higher
Applicable models
E5
@
C-T Series, E5
@
C Series, and E5CB Series
USB interface standard
Conforms to USB Specification 2.0.
DTE speed 38400 bps
Connector
specifications
Computer: USB (type A plug)
Digital Temperature Controller:
Special serial connector
Power supply Bus power (Supplied from USB host
controller.) *2
Power supply voltage
5 VDC
Current consumption
450 mA max.
Output voltage
4.7±0.2 VDC
(Supplied from USB-Serial Conversion
Cable to the Digital Temperature Controller.)
Output current
250 mA max.
(Supplied from USB-Serial Conversion
Cable to the Digital Temperature Controller.)
Ambient operating
temperature 0 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing)
Ambient operating
humidity 10% to 80%
Storage temperature -20 to 60°C (with no condensation or icing)
Storage humidity 10% to 80%
Altitude 2,000 m max.
Weight Approx. 120 g
Transmission line
connection method RS-485: Multidrop
Communications RS-485 (two-wire, half duplex)
Synchronization method
Start-stop synchronization
Protocol CompoWay/F, or Modbus
Baud rate *9600, 19200, 38400, or 57600 bps
Transmission code ASCII
Data bit length *7 or 8 bits
Stop bit length *1 or 2 bits
Error detection
Vertical parity (none, even, odd)
Block check character (BCC) with
CompoWay/F or CRC-16 Modbus
Flow control None
Interface RS-485
Retry function None
Communications buffer
217 bytes
Communications
response wait time
0 to 99 ms
Default: 20 ms
Programless
communica-
tions
*
You can use the memory in the PLC to read and write
E5
@
C-T parameters, start and reset operation, etc. The
E5
@
C-T automatically performs communications with
PLCs. No communications programming is required.
Number of connected Digital Temperature
Controllers: 32 max.
Applicable PLCs
OMRON PLCs CS Series, CJ Series, CP
Series, NJ Series, or NX1P
Mitsubishi Electric PLCs
MELSEC Q Series, L Series,
or iQ-R Series
Component
Communica
tions
When Digital Temperature Controllers are connected,
set points and RUN/STOP commands can be sent
from the Digital Temperature Controller that is set as
the master to the Digital Temperature Controllers that
are set as slaves.
Slope and offsets can be set for the set point.
Number of connected Digital Temperature
Controllers: 32 max. (including master)
Copying *
When Digital Temperature Controllers are connected,
the parameters can be copied from the Digital
Temperature Controller that is set as the master to the
Digital Temperature Controllers that are set as slaves.
E54-CT1
E54-CT3
E54-CT1L
E54-CT3L
Dielectric strength
1,000 VAC for 1 min 1,500 VAC for 1 min
Vibration resistance
50 Hz, 98 m/s2
Weight
E54-CT1: Approx. 11.5 g
E54-CT3: Approx. 50 g
E54-CT1L: Approx. 14 g
E54-CT3L: Approx. 57 g
Accessories
E54-CT3 Only
Armatures (2)
Plugs (2)
None
CT input (for heater
current detection)
Models with detection for single-phase
heaters: One input
Models with detection for singlephase or
three-phase heaters: Two inputs
Maximum heater
current 50 A AC
Input current
indication accuracy ±5% FS ±1 digit max.
Heater burnout alarm
setting range
*
1
0.1 to 49.9 A (in units of 0.1 A)
Minimum detection ON time: 100 ms *3
SSR failure alarm
setting range *2
0.1 to 49.9 A (in units of 0.1 A)
Minimum detection OFF time: 100 ms *4
500
300
100
50
30
10
5
3
1
0123456
E5CC-T
250 VAC, 30 VDC
(resistive load)
cosφ = 1
Life (× 104 operations)
E5CC-T
88
External Connections
E5CC-T
Note: 1. The application of the terminals depends on the model.
2. Do not wire the terminals that are shown with a gray background.
3. When complying with EMC standards, the cable that connects the sensor must be 30 m or less.
If the cable length exceeds 30 m, compliance with EMC standards will not be possible.
4. Connect M3 crimped terminals.
5. Due to UL Listing requirements, use the E54-CT1L or E54-CT3L Current Transformer with the factory wiring (internal wiring).
Use a UL category XOBA or XOBA7 current transformer that is UL Listed for field wiring (external wiring) and not the factory wiring
(internal wiring).
Isolation/Insulation Block Diagrams
Models with 3 Auxiliary Outputs
17
18 12
15
16
1
2
13
14
3
11
4
6
7
8
9
10
5
6
4
5
6
5
6
Pt
+
−
mA
−
+
5
4
(5) Sensor (Temperature/Analog) Input
V
−5
V6
+
4
TC
4
I
(no polarity)
11
12
(3) Input Power Supply
11
12
100 to 240 VAC 24 VAC/DC
(2) Auxiliary Outputs
Auxiliary outputs 1, 2, and 3
7
8
9
10
Auxiliary output 2
Auxiliary output 3
Auxiliary output 1
+
+
−
16
17
18
13
16
17
18
13
14
15
18
13
14
15
16
17
18
16
17
005
Event inputs 1 to 4
004
Communications (RS-485)
and event inputs 3 and 4
13
006
Event inputs 1 and 2, and
transfer output
(6) Options
001
Event inputs 1 and 2,
and CT1
V
I
003
Communications
(RS-485), CT1, and CT2
14
15
14
15
EV1
EV2
EV1
EV2
EV3
EV4
EV3
EV4
B(+)
A(−)
RS-485
B(+)
A(−)
RS-485
CT2
COM
CT1
+−
3
1
2
3
1
2−
Models with
1 Relay
Output
3+Q
1+
2−
3
(1) Control outputs 1, 2
Q
1
2
Models with 1
Voltage Output
(for Driving SSR)
+
RX QX CX QQ
CQR
OUT1 OUT1 OUT1 OUT1
OUT2
A
B
B
Voltage output
(for driving SSR)
12 VDC, 21 mA
Relay output
250 VAC: 2 A
(resistive load)
3+
1+
2-
OUT1
C
OUT2
Q
CQ
E5CC M
13
14
15
16
17
18
EV1
EV2
CT1
(−)
(−)
(−)(−)
(−)
Transfer output
Control output 2 Auxiliary outputs
35
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Terminal type
The E5CC-T is set for a K-type thermocouple (input
type = 5) by default. An input error (s.err) will occur
if the input type setting does not agree with the
temperature sensor. Check the input type.
Relay output
250 VAC, 3 A
(resistive load)
Voltage output
(for driving SSR)
12 VDC, 21 mA
Linear current output
0 to 20 mA DC
4 to 20 mA DC
Load: 500 Ω max.
Control output 1
Models with 1
Linear Current
Output
Models with 2
Voltage Outputs
(for Driving SSR)
Models with 2 Outputs:
Linear Current Output
and Voltage (for Driving SSR)
T
Models with 3 auxiliary outputs:
Use no-voltage inputs for the event inputs.
The polarity for non-contact inputs is given in parentheses.
Sensor input and CT inputs
Communications and event inputs
Voltage output (for driving SSR),
linear current output, and transfer output
Relay output
Auxiliary outputs 1, 2, 3
: Reinforced insulation
: Functional isolation
Power
supply
Note: Auxiliary outputs 1 to 3 are not insulated.
E5CC-T
89
Nomenclature
Dimensions (Unit: mm)
Controllers
No. 1 display
No. 2 display
PV or specified monitor/setting parameter
SP or specified monitor/parameter value
Top-panel Setup Tool port
Use the
UD
Keys to set the
parameter.
Press U Key for at least 1 second
when Process value/Set point
parameter are displayed in Program
SP Mode to go to Display Segment
Selection parameter in Program
Setting Level.
Top View of E5CC-T
Operation indicators
Temperature unit
Press O Key once to go to
Program Setting Level.
Press O Key for at least 3
seconds to go to Initial Setting
Level.
Use the
M
Key to change to another parameter.
Press
M
and
D
Keys simultaneously for at
least 1 second to switch between run and reset
status.
Use
S
Key to change the digit (default setting).
Front panel
E5CC-T
45+0.6
0
45+0.6
0
45+0.6
0
60 min.
(48 × number of units - 2.5)+1.0
0
Panel Cutout
Mounted Separately Group Mounted
Group mounting does not
allow waterproofing.
48 × 48
(64)
58
604
1
48 × 48
Mounting Adapter
(Accessory, Y92F-49
(also available for
ordering separately))
Waterproof Packing
(Accessory, Y92S-P8
(also available for
ordering separately))
E5CC-T
• Recommended panel thickness is 1 to 5 mm.
• Group mounting is not possible in the vertical direction. (Maintain
the specified mounting space between Controllers.)
• To mount the Controller so that it is waterproof, insert the water-
proof packing onto the Controller.
• When two or more Controllers are mounted, make sure that the
surrounding temperature does not exceed the allowable operating
temperature specified in the specifications.
• Use a control panel thickness of 1 to 3 mm if the Y92A-48N and a
USB-Serial Conversion Cable are used together.
The Setup Tool port is on the top of the Temperature Controller.
It is used to connect the Temperature Controller to the computer
to use the Setup Tool.
The E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is required to
make the connection.
Refer to the instructions that are provided with the USB-Serial
Conversion Cable for the connection procedure.
Note:
Do not leave the USB-Serial Conversion Cable
connected when you use the Temperature Controller.
E5CC-T
90
Accessories (Order Separately)
Terminal Covers
(2110)
250 263 1510
USB connector
(type A plug) Serial connector
LED (SD)
LED (PWR)
LED (RD)
USB-Serial Conversion Cable
E58-CIFQ2
48
48.8
22
9.1
10
44.8
2 3.8
Terminal Cover
(E53-COV23)
E53-COV17 E53-COV23 (Three Covers provided.)
Waterproof Packing
Y92S-P8 (for DIN 48 × 48) The Waterproof Packing is provided with the Temperature Controller.
Order the Waterproof Packing separately if it becomes lost or damaged.
The Waterproof Packing can be used to achieve an IP66 degree of protection.
(Deterioration, shrinking, or hardening of the waterproof packing may occur depending on the
operating environment. Therefore, periodic replacement is recommended to ensure the level of
waterproofing specified in IP66. The time for periodic replacement depends on the operating
environment. Be sure to confirm this point at your site.
Consider three years as a rough standard.)
E5CC-T
91
Current Transformers
5.8 dia.
Two, 3.5 dia.
30
21
15
25 2.5
40
10.5
2.8
7.5
5
10
Filler
(epoxy)
Case
E54-CT1 Thru-current (Io) vs. Output Voltage (Eo)
(Reference Values)
E54-CT1 or E54-CT1L
Maximum continuous heater current: 50 A (50/60 Hz)
Number of windings: 400±2
Winding resistance: 18±2 Ω
Thru-current (Io) A (r.m.s.)
1 10 100mA 1 10 100
1,000A
100V
Frequency: 50 Hz
Distortion
factor
10%
3%
1%
100Ω
RL=10Ω
∞
10
1
100mV
10
1
100μV
10
1kΩ
Output voltage (Eo) V (r.m.s.)
E54-CT1L
5.8 dia. Filler (epoxy)
Case (PBT)
Shrinkable tube
Two, 3.5 dia.
Cable (AWG18)
25 2.5
115±5
8
21
10.5
40
30
5
15
10
Mark (yellow)
(12)
E5CC-T
92
E54-CT3 Accessories
• Armature
12 dia.
2.36 dia.
Two, M3 (depth: 4)
40 × 40
30
9
30
8
Filler
(epoxy)
Case
(PBT)
15
40
Approx. 3 dia.
18
(22)
Approx. 6 dia.
Plug
Armature
Lead
E54-CT3
Connection Example
•Plug
Thru-current (Io) vs. Output Voltage (Eo)
(Reference Values)
E54-CT3 or E54-CT3L
Maximum continuous heater current: 120 A (50/60 Hz)
(Maximum continuous heater current for an OMRON
Digital Temperature Controller is 50 A.)
Number of windings: 400±2
Winding resistance: 8±0.8 Ω
Thru-current (Io) A (r.m.s.)
1 10 100mA 1 10 100
1,000A
100V
Frequency: 50 Hz
Distortion
factor
10%
3%
1%
1kΩ
100Ω
50Ω
RL=10Ω
500Ω
∞
10
1
100mV
10
1
100μV
10
Output voltage (Eo) V (r.m.s.)
Filler (epoxy)
Case (PBT)
Cable (AWG18)
12.0
dia.
30
40
8
40 15
100±5
8
Two, M3
(depth: 4)
30
E54-CT3L
E5CC-T
93
Adapter
DIN Track Mounting Adapter
Fixture (Accessory)
69.6 to 77.6
8767 × 67
72 × 72
76
4.7
72 × 72
48 × 48
Panel (1 to 8 mm) Mounting Adapter
Y92F-30
(Accessory)
62.8
To back of the E5CC-T
2.2 4.7
Y92F-45
Mounted to E5CC-T
Note: 1. Use this Adapter when the Front Panel has already been prepared for the E5B@.
2. Only black is available.
3. You cannot use the E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable if you use the Y92F-45 Adapter. To use the USB-Serial
Conversion Cable to make the settings, do so before you mount the Temperature Controller in the panel.
4. You cannot use this Adapter together with the Y92F-49 Adapter that is provided with the E5CC-T Temperature
Controller.
50
61
3.5
38
48
80.5
Mounted to E5CC-T
Note: This Adapter cannot be used together with the Terminal Cover.
Remove the Terminal Cover to use the Adapter.
Y92F-52
This Adapter is used to mount the
E5CC-T to a DIN Track.
If you use the Adapter, there is no
need for a plate to mount in the
panel or to drill mounting holes in
the panel.
E5CC-T
94
Watertight Cover
Y92A-48N
Mounting Adapter
Y92F-49
Protective Cover Protective Cover
Y92A-48H
67.6
69
12
21.9 14
(2)
79.2
87.7
28.9
The Mounting Adapter is provided with the
Temperature Controller.
Order the Mounting Adapter separately if it
becomes lost or damaged.
This Protective Cover is soft type.
It is able to operate the controller with using
this cover.
Note: This Protective Cover cannot be used
if the Waterproof Packing is installed.
Y92A-48D
This Protective Cover is hard type.
Please use it for the mis-operation
prevention etc.
95
MEMO
96
Programmable Temperature Controller (Digital Controller)
E5EC-T/E5AC-T (48 × 96 mm/96 × 96 mm)
Programmable Controllers Join the E5
C Series!
Program up to 256 segments can handle a
wide variety of applications.
• Set up to 8 Programs (Patterns) with 32 Segments (Steps) Each
• A white LCD PV display with a height of approx. 18 mm for the E5EC-
T and 25 mm for the E5AC-T improves visibility.
• Tool ports are provided both on the top panel and the front panel. Set
up the Controller without wiring the power supply by connecting to the
computer with a Communications Conversion Cable (sold
separately). Setup is easy with the CX-Thermo (sold separately).
• High-speed sampling at 50 ms.
• Models are available with up to 4 auxiliary outputs, up to 6 event
inputs, and a transfer output to cover a wide range of applications.
• Short body with depth of only 60 mm.
• Easy connections to a PLC with programless communications. Use
component communications to link Temperature Controllers to each
other.
• The new position-proportional control models allow you to control
valves as well.
Main I/O Functions
*
48 × 96 mm
E5EC-T
96 × 96 mm
E5AC-T
Refer to your OMRON website for the most recent
information on applicable safety standards.
Refer to Safety Precautions on page 122.
*CSA conformance
evaluation by UL.
4-digit
displays
Sensor Input
Indication Accuracy
• Thermocouple input: ±0.3% of PV
• Pt input: ±0.2% of PV
• Analog input: ±0.2% of FS
Sampling Period
• 50 ms
Event Inputs
• None
• 2
• 4
• 6
Control Output 1
• Relay output
•
Voltage output (for driving SSR)
• Linear current output
Control Output 2
•
Voltage output (for driving SSR)
• Relay output
• Linear current output
Auxiliary Outputs
• 4
Transfer Output
• None
• 1
• PF (shift) Key
• Setup Tool port on front panel
• Temperature status display
•
Operating and editting the program
• Independent heating and
cooling PID control
• Parameter mask setting
• Display brightness setting
Three-level Display
Simultaneous display of the PV, SP,
Program No., Segment No., etc.
Serial Communications
• None
• RS-485
Universal input
• Thermocouple
• Pt
• Analog current/voltage
E5EC-T E5AC-T
This datasheet is provided as a guideline for selecting products.
Be sure to refer to the following manuals for application precautions and other information required for operation before attempting
to use the product.
E5@C-T Digital Temperature Controllers Programmable Type User’s Manual (Cat. No. H185)
E5@C-T Digital Temperature Controllers Programmable Type Communications Manual (Cat. No. H186)
E5EC-T/E5AC-T
97
Model Number Legend and Standard Models
Model Number Legend
Models with Screw Terminal Blocks
E5EC-T@@ 4@5M-@@@ (Example: E5EC-TRX4A5M-000)
−−−− − −
−−−
ABCDE F
E5AC-T@@ 4@5M-@@@ (Example: E5AC-TRX4A5M-000)
−−−−− −
−−−
ABCDE F
*1. The options that can be selected depend on the type of control output.
*2. The linear current output cannot be used as a transfer output.
Heating and Cooling Control
Using Heating and Cooling Control
A Control Output Assignment
If there is no control output 2, an auxiliary output is used as the cooling control output.
If there is a control output 2, the two control outputs are used for heating and cooling.
(It does not matter which output is used for heating and which output is used for cooling.)
B Control
If PID control is used, you can set PID control separately for heating and cooling.
This allows you to handle control systems with different heating and cooling response characteristics.
Model
A B C D E F
Meaning
Control outputs
1 and 2
No. of
auxiliary
outputs
Power
supply
voltage
Terminal
type
Input
type Options
E5EC-T 48 × 96 mm Programmable Type
E5AC-T 96 × 96 mm Programmable Type
Control output 1 Control output 2
RX Relay output None
QX Voltage output
(for driving SSR) None
*2CX Linear current output None
QQ Voltage output
(for driving SSR)
Voltage output
(for driving SSR)
QR Voltage output
(for driving SSR) Relay output
RR Relay output Relay output
*2CC Linear current output Linear current output
*2CQ Linear current output Voltage output
(for driving SSR)
PR Position-proportional relay
output
Position-proportional
relay output
44 (auxiliary outputs 1 and 2 with same common and
auxiliary outputs 3 and 4 with same common)
A 100 to 240 VAC
D 24 VAC/DC
5 Screw terminal blocks (with cover)
Control outputs 1 and 2 M Universal input
Option
selection
conditions
*1
For RX,
QX, QQ,
QR, RR, or
CQ
For CX or
CC For PR
HB alarm and
HS alarm
Communications
Event
inputs Transfer output
Selectable Selectable Selectable 000 --- --- --- ---
Selectable Selectable 004 --- RS-485 2 ---
Selectable 005 --- --- 4 ---
Selectable 008 1 RS-485 2 ---
Selectable 010 1 --- 4 ---
Selectable 019 1 --- 6 Provided.
Selectable 021 --- --- 6 Provided.
Selectable Selectable 022 --- RS-485 4 Provided.
E5EC-T/E5AC-T
98
Optional Products (Order Separately)
USB-Serial Conversion Cable
Communications Conversion Cable
Note: Always use this product together with the E58-CIFQ2.
This Cable is used to connect to the front-panel Setup Tool
port.
Terminal Covers
Note: The Terminal Covers E53-COV24 are provided with the Digital
Temperature Controller.
Waterproof Packing
Note: This Waterproof Packing is provided with the Digital
Temperature Controller.
Waterproof Cover
Front Port Cover
Note: This Front Port Cover is provided with the Digital Temperature
Controller.
Mounting Adapter
Note: This Mounting Adapter is provided with the Digital Temperature
Controller.
Current Transformers (CTs)
*Lead wires are included with these CTs. If UL certification is required, use
these CTs.
CX-Thermo Support Software
Note: CX-Thermo version 4.61 or higher is required for the E5EC-T/
E5AC-T.
For the system requirements for the CX-Thermo, refer to
information on the EST2-2C-MV4 on the OMRON website
(www.ia.omron.com).
Model
E58-CIFQ2
Model
E58-CIFQ2-E
Model
E53-COV24 (3pcs)
Applicable Controller Model
E5EC-T Y92S-P9
E5AC-T Y92S-P10
Applicable Controller Model
E5EC-T Y92A-49N
E5AC-T Y92A-96N
Model
Y92S-P7
Model
Y92F-51 (2pcs)
Hole diameter Model
5.8 mm E54-CT1
5.8 mm E54-CT1L*
12.0 mm E54-CT3
12.0 mm E54-CT3L*
Model
EST2-2C-MV4
E5EC-T/E5AC-T
99
Specifications
Ratings
Power supply voltage A in model number: 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
D in model number: 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz; 24 VDC
Operating voltage range 85 to 110% of rated supply voltage
Power consumption E5EC-T 8.7 VA max. at 100 to 240 VAC, and 5.5 VA max. at 24 VAC or 3.2 W max. at 24 VDC
E5AC-T 9.0 VA max. at 100 to 240 VAC, and 5.6 VA max. at 24 VAC or 3.4 W max. at 24 VDC
Sensor input
Temperature input
Thermocouple: K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B, C/W, or PL II
Platinum resistance thermometer: Pt100 or JPt100
Infrared temperature sensor (ES1B): 10 to 70°C, 60 to 120°C, 115 to 165°C, or 140 to 260°C
Analog input
Current input: 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA
Voltage input: 1 to 5 V, 0 to 5 V, or 0 to 10 V
Input impedance Current input: 150 Ω max., Voltage input: 1 MΩ min.
(Use a 1:1 connection when connecting the ES2-HB-N/THB-N.)
Control method 2-PID control (with auto-tuning) or ON/OFF control
Control
output
Relay output SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 5 A (resistive load), electrical life: 100,000 operations,
minimum applicable load: 5 V, 10 mA (reference value)
Voltage output
(for driving SSR)
Output voltage: 12 VDC ±20% (PNP), max. load current: 40 mA, with short-circuit protection circuit
(The maximum load current is 21 mA for models with two control outputs.)
Linear current output 4 to 20 mA DC/0 to 20 mA DC, load: 500 Ω max., resolution: approx. 10,000
Auxiliary
output
Number of outputs 4
Output specifications SPST-NO. relay outputs, 250 VAC, Models with 4 outputs: 2 A (resistive load),
Electrical life: 100,000 operations, Minimum applicable load: 10 mA at 5 V (reference value)
Event input
Number of inputs 2, 4 or 6 (depends on model)
External contact input
specifications
Contact input: ON: 1 kΩ max., OFF: 100 kΩ min.
Non-contact input: ON: Residual voltage: 1.5 V max., OFF: Leakage current: 0.1 mA max.
Current flow: Approx. 7 mA per contact
Transfer
output
Number of outputs 1 (only on models with a transfer output)
Output specifications Current output: 4 to 20 mA DC, Load: 500 Ω max., Resolution: Approx. 10,000
Linear voltage output: 1 to 5 VDC, load: 1 kΩ min., Resolution: Approx. 10,000
Potentiometer input 100 Ω to 10 kΩ
Setting method Digital setting using front panel keys
Indication method
11-segment digital display and individual indicators
Character height: E5EC-T: PV: 18.0 mm, SV: 11.0 mm, MV: 7.8 mm
E5AC-T: PV: 25.0 mm, SV: 15.0 mm, MV: 9.5 mm
Three displays. Contents: PV, SP, program No. and segment No., remaining segment time, or MV
(valve opening)
Numbers of digits: 4 digits
Bank switching None
Other functions
Manual output, heating/cooling control, loop burnout alarm, other alarm functions, heater burnout (HB)
alarm (including SSR failure (HS) alarm), 40% AT, 100% AT, MV limiter, input digital filter, robust
tuning, PV input shift, protection functions, extraction of square root, MV change rate limit, logic
operations, temperature status display, moving average of input value, and display brightness setting
Ambient operating temperature −10 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing), For 3-year warranty: −10 to 50°C with standard mounting
(with no condensation or icing)
Ambient operating humidity 25 to 85%
Storage temperature −25 to 65°C (with no condensation or icing)
Altitude 2,000 m max.
Recommended fuse T2A, 250 VAC, time-lag, low-breaking capacity
Installation environment Overvoltage category II, Pollution Degree 2 (EN/IEC/UL 61010-1)
E5EC-T/E5AC-T
100
Input Ranges
Thermocouple/Platinum Resistance Thermometer (Universal inputs)
Shaded settings are the default settings.
The applicable standards for the input types are as follows:
K, J, T, E, N, R, S, B: JIS C 1602-2015, IEC 60584-1 JPt100: JIS C 1604-1989, JIS C 1606-1989
L: Fe-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985 Pt100: JIS C 1604-1997, IEC 60751
U: Cu-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985 PL II: According to Platinel II electromotive force charts from BASF (previously Engelhard)
C/W: W5Re/W26Re, JIS C 1602-2015, ASTM E988-1990
Analog input
Sensor
type
Platinum resistance
thermometer Thermocouple Infrared temperature
sensor
Sensor
specification
Pt100 JPt100 K J T E L U N R S B
C/W
PLII
10 to
70°C
60 to
120°C
115 to
165°C
140 to
260°C
2300
1800
1700
1600
1500
1400
1300
1200
1100
1000
900
800
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
0
-100
-200
2300
1800
1700 1700
1300 1300 1300
850 850 850
600
500.0 500.0 500.0
400.0
400
400.0
400
400.0
260
120 165
100.0 100.0
90
100
0.0 0.0 00 000000
-20.0
-100
-20.0
-100
-200
-199.9 199.9
-200 -200
-199.9
-200 -200
-199.9
-200
Set value 012345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Input type Current Voltage
Input
specification
4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA
1 to 5 V 0 to 5 V 0 to 10 V
Setting range
Usable in the following ranges by scaling:
-1999 to 9999, -199.9 to 999.9,
-19.99 to 99.99 or -1.999 to 9.999
Set value 25 26 27 28 29
Temperature range (°C)
E5EC-T/E5AC-T
101
Alarm Types
Each alarm can be independently set to one of the following 17 alarm types. The default is 2: Upper limit. (see note.)
Auxiliary outputs are allocated for alarms. ON delays and OFF delays (0 to 999 s) can also be specified.
Note:
In the default settings for models with HB or HS alarms, alarm 1 is set to a heater alarm (HA) and the Alarm Type 1 parameter is not displayed.
To use alarm 1, set the output assignment to alarm 1.
Set
value
Alarm type
Alarm output operation
Description of function
When alarm value X
is positive
When alarm value X
is negative
0 Alarm function OFF Output OFF No alarm
1 Upper- and lower-limit *1*2
Set the upward deviation in the set point for the alarm upper
limit (H) and the lower deviation in the set point for the alarm
lower limit (L). The alarm is ON when the PV is outside this
deviation range.
2
(default) Upper-limit
Set the upward deviation in the set point by setting the alarm
value (X). The alarm is ON when the PV is higher than the
SP by the deviation or more.
3 Lower-limit
Set the downward deviation in the set point by setting the
alarm value (X). The alarm is ON when the PV is lower than
the SP by the deviation or more.
4Upper- and lower-limit
range *1*3
Set the upward deviation in the set point for the alarm upper
limit (H) and the lower deviation in the set point for the alarm
lower limit (L). The alarm is ON when the PV is inside this
deviation range.
5
Upper- and lower-limit with
standby sequence
*
1
*4A standby sequence is added to the upper- and lower-limit
alarm (1). *6
6Upper-limit with standby
sequence A standby sequence is added to the upper-limit alarm (2). *6
7Lower-limit with standby
sequence A standby sequence is added to the lower-limit alarm (3). *6
8Absolute-value upper-
limit
The alarm will turn ON if the process value is larger than the
alarm value (X) regardless of the set point.
9 Absolute-value lower-limit The alarm will turn ON if the process value is smaller than the
alarm value (X) regardless of the set point.
10
Absolute-value upper-
limit with standby
sequence
A standby sequence is added to the absolute-value upper-
limit alarm (8). *6
11 Absolute-value lower-limit
with standby sequence
A standby sequence is added to the absolute-value lower-
limit alarm (9). *6
12
LBA (alarm 1 type only)
-*7
13 PV change rate alarm - *8
14 SP absolute-value
upper-limit alarm
This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the set point (SP)
is higher than the alarm value (X).
15 SP absolute-value
lower-limit alarm
This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the set point (SP)
is lower than the alarm value (X).
16 MV absolute-value
upper-limit alarm *9
Standard Control Standard Control
This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the manipulated
variable (MV) is higher than the alarm value (X).
Heating/Cooling
Control (Heating MV) Heating/Cooling
Control (Heating MV)
Always ON
17 MV absolute-value
lower-limit alarm *9
Standard Control Standard Control
This alarm type turns ON the alarm when the manipulated
variable (MV) is lower than the alarm value (X).
Heating/Cooling
Control (Cooling MV) Heating/Cooling
Control (Cooling MV)
Always ON
ON
OFF PV
SP
LH
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
SP
LH
ON
OFF PV
SP
LH
ON
OFF PV
*
5
SP
X
ON
OFF PV SP
X
ON
OFF PV
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
SP
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF PV
0
X
ON
OFF SP
0
X
ON
OFF SP
0
X
ON
OFF SP
0
X
ON
OFF SP
0
X
ON
OFF MV
0
X
ON
OFF MV
0
X
ON
OFF MV
0
X
ON
OFF MV
0
X
ON
OFF MV
0
X
ON
OFF MV
E5EC-T/E5AC-T
102
*1. With set values 1, 4 and 5, the upper and lower limit values can
be set independently for each alarm type, and are expressed as
“L” and “H.”
*2. Set value: 1, Upper- and lower-limit alarm
*3. Set value: 4, Upper- and lower-limit range
*4. Set value: 5, Upper- and lower-limit with standby sequence
For Upper- and Lower-Limit Alarm Described Above *2
• Case 1 and 2
Always OFF when the upper-limit and lower-limit hysteresis overlaps.
• Case 3: Always OFF
*5. Set value: 5, Upper- and lower-limit with standby sequence
Always OFF when the upper-limit and lower-limit hysteresis
overlaps.
*6. Refer to the E5
@
C-T Digital Temperature Controllers
Programmable Type User's Manual (Cat. No. H185) for
information on the operation of the standby sequence.
*7. Refer to the E5
@
C-T Digital Temperature Controllers
Programmable Type User's Manual (Cat. No. H185) for
information on the loop burnout alarm (LBA). This setting cannot
be used with a position-proportional model.
*8. Refer to the E5
@
C-T Digital Temperature Controllers
Programmable Type User's Manual (Cat. No. H185) for
information on the PV change rate alarm.
*9. When heating/cooling control is performed, the MV absolute
upper limit alarm functions only for the heating operation and the
MV absolute lower limit alarm functions only for the cooling
operation.
LH
H<0, L>0
|H| < |L|
SP
Case 1
LH
H>0, L<0
|H| > |L|
SP
Case 2
LH
H<0, L<0
SP
LH
H<0, L>0
|H| ≥ |L|
SP
LH
H>0, L<0
|H| ≤ |L|
SP
Case 3 (Always ON)
LH
H<0, L>0
|H| < |L|
SP
Case 1
LH
H>0, L<0
|H| > |L|
SP
Case 2
LH
H<0, L<0
SP
L
L
H
H<0, L>0
|H| ≥ |L|
SP
H
H>0, L<0
|H| ≤ |L|
SP
Case 3 (Always OFF)
E5EC-T/E5AC-T
103
Characteristics
*1. The indication accuracy of K thermocouples in the -200 to 1300°C range, T and N thermocouples at a temperature of -100°C max., and U and
L thermocouples at any temperatures is ±2°C ±1 digit max. The indication accuracy of the B thermocouple at a temperature of 400°C max.
is not specified. The indication accuracy of B thermocouples at a temperature of 400 to 800°C is
±
3°C max. The indication accuracy of the R and S
thermocouples at a temperature of 200°C max. is
±
3°C
±
1 digit max. The indication accuracy of C/W thermocouples is (
±
0.3% of PV or
±
3
°
C, whichever
is greater)
±
1 digit max. The indication accuracy of PL II thermocouples is (
±
0.3% of PV or
±
2°C, whichever is greater)
±
1 digit max.
*2. Ambient temperature: -10°C to 23°C to 55°C, Voltage range: -15% to 10% of rated voltage
*3. K thermocouple at -100°C max.: ±10°C max.
*4. The unit is determined by the setting of the Integral/Derivative Time Unit parameter.
*5. External communications (RS-485) and USB-serial conversion cable communications can be used at the same time.
*6. Refer to your OMRON website for the most recent information on applicable models.
*7. Industrial electromagnetic environment (EN/IEC 61326-1 Table 2)
Indication accuracy
(at the ambient temperature of
23°C)
Thermocouple: (±0.3% of indication value or ±1°C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max. *1
Platinum resistance thermometer: (
±
0.2% of indication value or
±
0.8°C, whichever is greater)
±
1 digit max.
Analog input: ±0.2% FS ±1 digit max.
CT input: ±5% FS ±1 digit max.
Potentiometer input: ±5% FS ±1 digit max.
Transfer output accuracy ±0.3% FS max.
Influence of temperature *2
Thermocouple input (R, S, B, C/W, PL II): (
±
1% of indication value or
±
10°C, whichever is greater)
±
1 digit
max.
Other thermocouple input: (±1% of indication value or ±4°C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max. *3
Platinum resistance thermometer: (±1% of indication value or ±2°C, whichever is greater) ±1 digit max.
Analog input: ±1%FS ±1 digit max.
CT input: ±5% FS ±1 digit max.
Influence of voltage *2
Influence of EMS.
(at EN 61326-1)
Input sampling period 50ms
Hysteresis Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9°C or °F (in units of 0.1°C or°F)
Analog input: 0.01% to 99.99% FS (in units of 0.01% FS)
Proportional band (P) Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9°C or °F (in units of 0.1°C or °F)
Analog input: 0.1 to 999.9% FS (in units of 0.1% FS)
Integral time (I)
Standard, heating/cooling, or Position-proportional (Close): 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in
units of 0.1 s)
Position-proportional (Floating): 1 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.1 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *4
Derivative time (D) 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *4
Proportional band (P) for cooling Temperature input: 0.1 to 999.9°C or °F (in units of 0.1°C or °F)
Analog input: 0.1 to 999.9% FS (in units of 0.1% FS)
Integral time (I) for cooling 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *4
Derivative time (D) for cooling 0 to 9999 s (in units of 1 s), 0.0 to 999.9 s (in units of 0.1 s) *4
Control period 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1 to 99 s (in units of 1 s)
Manual reset value 0.0 to 100.0% (in units of 0.1%)
Alarm setting range -1999 to 9999 (decimal point position depends on input type)
Influence of signal source
resistance
Thermocouple: 0.1°C/Ω max. (100 Ω max.)
Platinum resistance thermometer: 0.1°C/Ω max. (10 Ω max.)
Insulation resistance 20 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC)
Dielectric strength 3,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of different charge
Vibration Malfunction 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s2 for 10 min each in X, Y, and Z directions
Resistance 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s2 for 2 hrs each in X, Y, and Z directions
Shock Malfunction 100 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions
Resistance 300 m/s2, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions
Weight E5EC-T Controller: Approx. 210 g, Mounting Adapter: Approx. 4 g × 2
E5AC-T Controller: Approx. 250 g, Mounting Adapter: Approx. 4 g × 2
Degree of protection Front panel: IP66, Rear case: IP20, Terminals: IP00
Memory protection Non-volatile memory (number of writes: 1,000,000 times)
Setup Tool CX-Thermo version 4.61 or higher
Setup Tool port
E5EC-T/E5AC-T top panel: An E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is used to connect to a USB
port on the computer.*5
E5EC-T/E5AC-T front panel: An E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable and E58-CIFQ2-E Conversion
Cable are used together to connect to a USB port on the computer.
*
5
Standards Approved standards cULus: UL 61010-1/CSA C22.2 No.61010-1, Korean wireless regulations (Radio law: KC Mark) (Some
models only.) *
6
Conformed standards EN 61010-1 (IEC 61010-1), RCM
EMC
EMI EN 61326-1 *7
Radiated Interference Electromagnetic Field Strength: EN 55011 Group 1, class A
Noise Terminal Voltage: EN 55011 Group 1, class A
EMS: EN 61326-1 *7
ESD Immunity: EN 61000-4-2
Electromagnetic Field Immunity: EN 61000-4-3
Burst Noise Immunity: EN 61000-4-4
Conducted Disturbance Immunity: EN 61000-4-6
Surge Immunity: EN 61000-4-5
Voltage Dip/Interrupting Immunity: EN 61000-4-11
E5EC-T/E5AC-T
104
Program Control
Number of programs (patterns)
8
Number of segments (steps) 32
Segment setting method Time setting (Segment set with set point and time.)
Slope setting (Segment set with segment type, set point, slope, and time.)
Segment times 0 h 0 min to 99 h 59 min
0 min 0 s to 99 min 59 s
Alarm setting Set separately for each program.
Reset operation Select either stopping control or fixed SP operation.
Startup operation Select continuing, resetting, manual operation, or run mode.
PID sets Number of sets 8
Setting method Set separately for each program (automatic PID group selection also supported).
Alarm SP function Select from ramp SP and target SP.
Program status control Segment operation Advance, segment jump, hold, and wait
Program operation Program repetitions and program links
Wait operation Wait method Waiting at segment ends
Wait width setting Same wait width setting for all programs
Time signals
Number of outputs 2
Number of ON/OFF
Operations 1 each per output
Setting method Set separately for each program.
Program status output Program end output (pulse width can be set), run output, stage output
Program startup operation
PV start Select from segment 1 set point, slope-priority PV start
Standby 0 h 0 min to 99 h 59 min
0 day 0 h to 99 day 23h
Operation end operation Select from resetting, continuing control at final set point, and fixed SP control.
Program SP shift Same program SP shift for all programs
E5EC-T/E5AC-T
105
USB-Serial Conversion Cable
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and or other countries.
*1. CX-Thermo version 4.65 or higher runs on Windows 10.
*2. Use a high-power port for the USB port.
Note:
A driver must be installed on the computer. Refer to the
Instruction
Manual
included with the Cable for the installation procedure.
Communications Specifications
*The baud rate, data bit length, stop bit length, and vertical parity can
be individually set using the Communications Setting Level.
Communications Functions
MELSEC is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
*Both the programless communications and the component
communications support the copying.
Current Transformer (Order Separately)
Ratings
Heater Burnout Alarms and SSR Failure
Alarms
*1. For heater burnout alarms, the heater current will be measured
when the control output is ON, and the output will turn ON if the
heater current is lower than the set value (i.e., heater burnout
detection current value).
*2. For SSR failure alarms, the heater current will be measured when
the control output is OFF, and the output will turn ON if the heater
current is higher than the set value (i.e., SSR failure detection
current value).
*3. The value is 30 ms for a control period of 0.1 s or 0.2 s.
*4. The value is 35 ms for a control period of 0.1 s or 0.2 s.
Electrical Life Expectancy Curve for
Relays (Reference Values)
Applicable OS Windows XP/Vista/7/8/10 *1
Applicable software CX-Thermo version 4.61 or higher
Applicable models
E5
@
C-T Series, E5
@
C Series, and E5CB Series
USB interface standard
Conforms to USB Specification 2.0.
DTE speed 38400 bps
Connector
specifications
Computer: USB (type A plug)
Digital Temperature Controller:
Special serial connector
Power supply
Bus power (Supplied from USB host controller.)
*
2
Power supply voltage
5 VDC
Current consumption
450 mA max.
Output voltage
4.7±0.2 VDC
(Supplied from USB-Serial Conversion
Cable to the Digital Temperature Controller.)
Output current
250 mA max.
(Supplied from USB-Serial Conversion
Cable to the Digital Temperature Controller.)
Ambient operating
temperature 0 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing)
Ambient operating
humidity 10% to 80%
Storage temperature -20 to 60°C (with no condensation or icing)
Storage humidity 10% to 80%
Altitude 2,000 m max.
Weight Approx. 120 g
Transmission line
connection method RS-485: Multidrop
Communications RS-485 (two-wire, half duplex)
Synchronization
method Start-stop synchronization
Protocol CompoWay/F, or Modbus
Baud rate *9600, 19200, 38400, or 57600 bps
Transmission code ASCII
Data bit length *7 or 8 bits
Stop bit length *1 or 2 bits
Error detection
Vertical parity (none, even, odd)
Block check character (BCC) with
CompoWay/F or CRC-16 Modbus
Flow control None
Interface RS-485
Retry function None
Communications buffer
217 bytes
Communications
response wait time
0 to 99 ms
Default: 20 ms
Programless
communica-
tions
*
You can use the memory in the PLC to read and write
E5
@
C-T parameters, start and reset operation, etc. The
E5
@
C-T automatically performs communications with
PLCs. No communications programming is required.
Number of connected Digital Temperature Controllers:
32 max.
Applicable PLCs
OMRON PLCs CS Series, CJ Series, CP Series,
NJ Series, or NX1P
Mitsubishi Electric PLCs
MELSEC Q Series, L Series,
or iQ-R Series
Component
Communic
ations
When Digital Temperature Controllers are connected,
set points and RUN/STOP commands can be sent
from the Digital Temperature Controller that is set as
the master to the Digital Temperature Controllers that
are set as slaves.
Slope and offsets can be set for the set point.
Number of connected Digital Temperature
Controllers: 32 max. (including master)
Copying *
When Digital Temperature Controllers are connected,
the parameters can be copied from the Digital
Temperature Controller that is set as the master to the
Digital Temperature Controllers that are set as slaves.
E54-CT1
E54-CT3
E54-CT1L
E54-CT3L
Dielectric strength
1,000 VAC for 1 min 1,500 VAC for 1 min
Vibration resistance
50 Hz, 98 m/s2
Weight
E54-CT1: Approx. 11.5 g
E54-CT3: Approx. 50 g
E54-CT1L: Approx. 14 g
E54-CT3L: Approx. 57 g
Accessories
E54-CT3 Only
Armatures (2)
Plugs (2)
None
CT input (for heater
current detection)
Models with detection for single-phase
heaters: One input
Maximum heater
current 50 A AC
Input current
indication accuracy ±5% FS ±1 digit max.
Heater burnout alarm
setting range
*
1
0.1 to 49.9 A (in units of 0.1 A)
Minimum detection ON time: 100 ms *3
SSR failure alarm
setting range *2
0.1 to 49.9 A (in units of 0.1 A)
Minimum detection OFF time: 100 ms *4
500
300
100
50
30
10
5
3
1
0123456
Switching current (A)
E5EC-T/E5AC-T
250 VAC, 30 VDC
(resistive load)
cosφ = 1
Life (× 104 operations)
E5EC-T/E5AC-T
106
External Connections
E5EC-T/E5AC-T
Isolation/Insulation Block Diagrams
Models with 4 Auxiliary Outputs
Note: Auxiliary outputs 1 to 2 and 3 to 4 are not insulated.
-
+
-
+
Models with 2 Output:
Linear Current Output
and Voltage (for Driving SSR)
3
4
5
6
CQ
OUT1
C
OUT2
Q
010
Four event inputs
and one CT
008
(6) Options
004
Communications
and two event inputs
019
Six event inputs, one CT, and
transfer output
022
Communications, four event inputs,
and transfer output
021
Six event inputs and
transfer output
Transfer
output
(5) Sensor (Temperature/Analog) Input
V
− 23
V24
+
22
TC
22
+
−
mA
−
+
23
22
23
24
Pt I
24
22
23
24
A
B
B
(2) Auxiliary Outputs
7
8
11
12
Auxiliary outputs 1 to 4
9
10 Auxiliary output 2
Auxiliary output 1
Auxiliary output 4
Auxiliary output 3
Potentiometer
input
19
20
21
C
W
O
+
−
(1)Control Outputs
Models with
1 Relay Output
Models with 1
Voltage Output
(for Driving SSR)
3
4
5
6
3
4
5
6
RX QX
QR
OUT1 OUT1
+
++
+
−
− − −
Models with 2 Voltage
Outputs (for Driving SSR)
Models with Voltage Output (for
Driving SSR) and Relay Output
Models with 1
Linear Current
Output
3
4
5
6
3
4
5
6
3
4
5
6
QR
CX QQ
Q
QC
R
Q
OUT1
OUT2
OUT1 OUT1
OUT2
−
+
−
+
Models with 2
Relay Outputs
Models with 2
Linear Current Outputs
3
4
5
6
3
4
5
6
RR/PR CC
R
R
C
C
OUT1 OUT1
OUT2OUT2
2
(no polarity)
(3) Input Power Supply
100 to 240 VAC
1
24 VAC/DC
1
2
(-)
19
20
21
13
14
15
17
18
16
EV1
EV2
B(+)
A(-)
RS-485
21
19
20
17
18
15
16
13
14
EV1
EV2
B(+)
A(-)
RS-485
CT1
21
19
20
16
17
18
13
14
15
EV1
EV2
EV3
EV4
CT1
−33
32
31
30
29
28
++
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
V
I
EV1
EV2
EV3
EV4
EV5
EV6
28
29
30
32
31
33
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
+
−
+V
I
EV1
EV2
EV5
EV6
B(+)
A(-)
RS-485
23
24
11
12
35
36
19
20
21
22
9
10
31
32
33
34
2
25
7
8
175
6
29
30
3
4
26
27
28
113
14
15
16
18 21
++
−
19
20
16
17
18
13
14
15
29
30
31
32
33
28
V
I
EV1
EV2
EV3
EV4
EV5
EV6
CT1
Voltage output
(for driving SSR)
12 VDC, 21 mA
Relay output
250 VAC, 5 A
(resistive load)
Linear current output
0 to 20 mA DC
4 to 20 mA DC
Load: 500 Ω max.
Linear current output
0 to 20 mA DC
Voltage output (for driving SSR)
12 VDC, 40 mA
21 mA if there are two control outputs
Load: 500 Ω max.
4 to 20 mA DC
Relay output
250 VAC, 5A (resistive load)
Control output 1 Auxiliary outputsControl output 2
Relay output
250 VAC, 2 A
(resistive load)
005
Four event inputs
21
19
20
16
17
18
13
14
15
EV1
EV2
EV3
EV4
Communications, two
event inputs, and one CT
Transfer
output
Transfer
output
E5EC M
45
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Terminal type
E5AC M
45
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Terminal type
TT
Models with 4 auxiliary
outputs:
The E5@C-T is set for a K-type thermocouple (input type = 5) by
default. An input error (s.err) will not occur if the input type setting
does not agree with the temperature sensor. Check the input type.
(-)
(-) (-)
(-)
(-)
(-)
(-)
(-)
(-)
(-) (-) (-) (-)
Use no-voltage inputs for the event inputs.
The polarity for non-contact inputs is given in parentheses.
Note: 1. The application of the terminals depends on the model.
2. Do not wire the terminals that are shown with a gray background.
3. When complying with EMC standards, the cable that connects the sensor must be 30 m or less. If the cable length exceeds 30 m,
compliance with EMC standards will not be possible.
4. Connect M3 crimped terminals.
5. Due to UL Listing requirements, use the E54-CT1L or E54-CT3L Current Transformer with the factory wiring (internal wiring). Use a UL
category XOBA or XOBA7 current transformer that is UL Listed for field wiring (external wiring) and not the factory wiring (internal wiring).
Sensor input, CT input, potentiometer input, and remote SP input
Communications and event inputs
Voltage output (for driving SSR),
linear current output, and transfer output
Relay output
Auxiliary outputs 1, 2
Auxiliary outputs 3, 4
: Reinforced insulation : Functional isolation
Power
Supply
E5EC-T/E5AC-T
107
Nomenclature
Top View of E5EC-T
Top-panel
Setup
Tool port
Temperature unit
Front-panel Setup Tool port
Use the M Key to change to another parameter.
No. 1 display
No. 2 display
No. 3 display
PV or specified monitor/parameter
SP or specified monitor/parameter value
Use the U D Keys to set
the parameter.
Front panel
Press O Key for at least 3 seconds to go to Initial Setting Level.
Operation indicators
Program No., segment No.,
remaining segment time, or MV
(valve opening).
Press O Key once to go to Program Setting Level.
Use S Key to change the
digit (default setting).
Press U Key for at least 1 second when
Process value/Set point parameter are
displayed in Program SP Mode to go to
Display Segment Selection parameter in
Program Setting Level.
Press M and D Keys simultaneously for at
least 1 second to switch between run and
reset status.
E5EC-T
Front Panel
Top View of E5AC-T
Top-panel
Setup
Tool port
Temperature unit
Operation indicators
Press the M Key to switch to another parameter.
No. 1 display
No. 2 display
No. 3 display
PV or specified monitor/parameter
SP or specified monitor/parameter value
Press the U or D Key
to set the parameter.
Front-panel Setup Tool port
Press the S Key to change the digit (default setting).
Program No. and segment No.,
remaining segment time, or MV
(valve opening).
Press
U
Key for at least 1 second when
Process value/Set point parameter are
displayed in Program SP Mode to go to
Display Segment Selection parameter in
Program Setting Level.
Press M and D Keys simultaneously for at least 1
second to change between run and reset status.
Press the O Key for at least 3
seconds to go to the Initial Setting
Level.
Press the O Key once to go to the
Program Setting Level.
E5AC-T
E5EC-T/E5AC-T
108
Dimensions (Unit: mm)
Controllers
Mounting Adapter
(Accessory, Y92F-51
(also available for
ordering separately))
Waterproof Packing
(Accessory, Y92S-P9
(also available for
ordering separately))
44
91
48
96
1
60
4
(64)
110
E5EC-T
92-0.8
0
92+0.8
0
45+0.6
0
120 min.
(48 × number of units − 2.5)+1.0
0
Group mounting does not
allow waterproofing.
Mounted Separately Group Mounted *
• Recommended panel thickness is 1 to 8 mm.
• Group mounting is not possible in the vertical direction. (Maintain the
specified mounting space between Controllers.)
• To mount the Controller so that it is waterproof, insert the waterproof
packing onto the Controller.
• When two or more Controllers are mounted, make sure that the sur-
rounding temperature does not exceed the allowable operating tem-
perature specified in the specifications.
*
Selections for Control Outputs 1 and 2: QQ, QR, RR, CC, PR, or CQ
If you also specify 019, 021, 022 for the option selection and use
group mounting, the ambient temperature must be 45°C or less.
Maintain the following spacing when more than one Digital
Controller is installed at an ambient temperature of 55°C.
45
-0.6
0
60 min.
120 min.
92
+0.8
0
• Setup Tool ports are provided as
standard feature. Use these ports to
connect a computer to the Digital
Temperature Controller. The E58-
CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable
is required to connect to the port on
the top panel. The E58-CIFQ2 USB-
Serial Conversion Cable and E58-
CIFQ2-E Communications
Conversion Cable are required to
connect to the port on the front panel.
(You cannot leave either port
connected constantly during
operation.)
E5EC-T/E5AC-T
109
92+0.8
0
120 min.
(96 × number of units − 3.5)+1.0
0
Group mounting does not
allow waterproofing.
Mounted Separately Group Mounted
92+0.8
0
92+0.8
0
Mounting Adapter
(Accessory, Y92F-51
(also available for
ordering separately))
Waterproof Packing
(Accessory, Y92S-P10
(also available for
ordering separately))
1
4
(64)
60
110
91 x 91
96 x 96
E5AC-T
• Recommended panel thickness is 1 to 8 mm.
• Group mounting is not possible in the vertical direction. (Maintain the
specified mounting space between Controllers.)
• To mount the Controller so that it is waterproof, insert the waterproof
packing onto the Controller.
• When two or more Controllers are mounted, make sure that the sur-
rounding temperature does not exceed the allowable operating tem-
perature specified in the specifications.
• Setup Tool ports are provided as standard feature. Use these ports to connect a computer to the
Digital Temperature Controller. The E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is required to
connect to the port on the top panel. The E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion Cable and E58-
CIFQ2-E Communications Conversion Cable are required to connect to the port on the front panel.
(You cannot leave either port connected constantly during operation.)
E5EC-T/E5AC-T
110
Accessories (Order Separately)
(2110)
250 263 1510
USB connector
(type A plug) Serial connector
LED (SD)
LED (PWR)
LED (RD)
USB-Serial Conversion Cable
E58-CIFQ2
Connecting to the E58-CIFQ2 USB-Serial Conversion CableConversion Cable
(1510) 250
(2110)
E58-CIFQ2 (Order Separately) Conversion Cable
263 1510
Note: Always use this product together with the E58-CIFQ2.
Conversion Cable
E58-CIFQ2-E
10
91
2 3.8
Terminal Covers
E53-COV24 (Three Covers provided.)
Waterproof Packing
Y92S-P9 (for DIN 48 × 96)
The Waterproof Packing is provided with the Temperature
Controller.
Order the Waterproof Packing separately if it becomes lost or
damaged.
The degree of protection when the Waterproof Packing is used
is IP66.
Also, keep the Port Cover on the front-panel Setup Tool port
of the E5EC-T/E5AC-T securely closed.
To maintain an IP66 degree of protection, the Waterproof
Packing and the Port Cover for the front-panel Setup Tool port
must be periodically replaced because they may deteriorate,
shrink, or harden depending on the operating environment.
The replacement period will vary with the operating
environment.
Check the required period in the actual application.
Use 3 years or sooner as a guideline.
Y92S-P10 (for DIN 96 × 96)
Setup Tool Port Cover for top panel
Y92S-P7
Mounting Adapter
Y92F-51 (Two Adapters provided.)
Order this Port Cover
separately if the Port Cover on
the front-panel Setup Tool port
is lost or damaged. The
Waterproof Packing must be
periodically replaced because
it may deteriorate, shrink, or
harden depending on the
operating environment.
One pair is provided with the
Controller.
Order the Mounting Adapter
separately if it becomes lost
or damaged.
E5EC-T/E5AC-T
111
Current Transformers
131.7
115.6 28.9
21.9 (2)
Watertight Cover
Y92A-96N (96 × 96)
Watertight Cover
Y92A-49N (48 × 96)
131.7
67.6 28.9
21.9 (2)
5.8 dia.
Two, 3.5 dia.
30
21
15
25 2.5
40
10.5
2.8
7.5
5
10
Filler
(epoxy)
Case
E54-CT1 Thru-current (Io) vs. Output Voltage (Eo)
(Reference Values)
E54-CT1 or E54-CT1L
Maximum continuous heater current: 50 A (50/60 Hz)
Number of windings: 400±2
Winding resistance: 18±2 Ω
Thru-current (Io) A (r.m.s.)
1 10 100mA 1 10 100
1,000A
100V
Frequency: 50 Hz
Distortion
factor
10%
3%
1%
100Ω
RL=10Ω
∞
10
1
100mV
10
1
100μV
10
1kΩ
Output voltage (Eo) V (r.m.s.)
E54-CT1L
5.8 dia. Filler (epoxy)
Case (PBT)
Shrinkable tube
Two, 3.5 dia.
Cable (AWG18)
25 2.5
115±5
8
21
10.5
40
30
5
15
10
Mark (yellow)
(12)
E5EC-T/E5AC-T
112
E54-CT3 Accessories
• Armature
12 dia.
2.36 dia.
Two, M3 (depth: 4)
40 × 40
30
9
30
8
Filler
(epoxy)
Case
(PBT)
15
40
Approx. 3 dia.
18
(22)
Approx. 6 dia.
Plug
Armature
Lead
E54-CT3
Connection Example
•Plug
Thru-current (Io) vs. Output Voltage (Eo)
(Reference Values)
E54-CT3 or E54-CT3L
Maximum continuous heater current: 120 A (50/60 Hz)
(Maximum continuous heater current for an OMRON
Digital Temperature Controller is 50 A.)
Number of windings: 400±2
Winding resistance: 8±0.8 Ω
Thru-current (Io) A (r.m.s.)
1 10 100mA 1 10 100
1,000A
100V
Frequency: 50 Hz
Distortion
factor
10%
3%
1%
1kΩ
100Ω
50Ω
RL=10Ω
500Ω
∞
10
1
100mV
10
1
100μV
10
Output voltage (Eo) V (r.m.s.)
Filler (epoxy)
Case (PBT)
Cable (AWG18)
12.0
dia.
30
40
8
40 15
100±5
8
Two, M3
(depth: 4)
30
E54-CT3L
113
MEMO
E5@C/E5@C-T
114
Operation
Setting Levels Diagram
E5C
This diagram shows all of the setting levels. To move to the advanced function setting level and calibration level, you must enter passwords. Some
parameters are not displayed depending on the protect level setting and the conditions of use.
Control stops when you move from the operation level to the initial setting level.
*1. Set the PF Setting parameter to a-m (Auto/Manual).
*2. The No. 1 display will flash when the keys are pressed for 1 s or longer.
*3. Set the PF Setting parameter to pfdp (monitor/setting items).
Operation in progress
Stopped
Communications
Setting Level
Advanced Function
Setting Level
Power ON
Initial Setting Level
Operation Level
Adjustment Level
Press the O + M Keys for
at least 1 s
Only when Manual Mode was used
just before power OFF
Level changes
automatically.
Press the S Key.
*3
Press the S Key.
*3
Protect Level
Calibration Level
Manual Control
Level
Press the O Key for at least 1 s.
Press the O Key
for at least 1 s or
the S Key for at
least 1 s
*1
Used to set the MV
manually. Used for SP, alarm
values, and other basic
settings and monitoring.
Used to set protection
for operations.
Used to change adjustment
parameters (PID constants,
adjustment sensitivity, etc.).
Press the O + M
Keys for at least 3 s.
*2
Release protection and
then enter the password
(−169) for the amoV
(Move to Advanced
Setting Level)
parameter.
Used to set application functions.
Enter the password (1201)
while cmov (Move to
Calibration Level
parameter) is displayed.
Used to set the input type
and other basic settings.
Press the O Key
for at least 1 s.
Used to set up
communications.
Press the O Key for
at least 3 s
*2
Press the O Key for less than 1 s.
(models with communications only).
Press the O Key once.
O Key for at
least 3 s while
a-m is
displayed.*2
S Key for at least 1 s
*1
Monitor/Setting
Item Level
Used to display
specified monitor
and setting items.
Control and auxiliary outputs stop.
E5@C/E5@C-T
115
E5C-T
This diagram shows all of the setting levels. To move to the advanced function setting level and calibration level, you must enter passwords. Some
parameters are not displayed depending on the protect level setting and the conditions of use.
*1. Set the PF Setting parameter to a-m (Auto/Manual).
*2. The No. 1 display will flash when the keys are pressed for 1 s or longer.
*3. Set the PF Setting parameter to pfdp (monitor/setting items).
Operation in progress
Stopped
Calibration Level
Control and auxiliary outputs stop.
Advanced Function
Setting Level
Advanced settings
Communications
Setting Level
Power ON
Initial Setting Level
Operation Level
Adjustment Level
Monitor/Setting
Item Level
Press O and M Keys
for at least 1 s.
Starting in manual mode
Level changes
automatically.
Press O Key
for less than 1 s.
Protect Level
Manual Control
Level
Used to set the MV
manually.
Used for SPs and other
basic settings and
monitoring.
Press O Key for at
least 3 s while a-m is
displayed.
*2
Used to set protection
for operations.
Enter the password (1201)
while cmov (Move to
Calibration Level
parameter) is displayed.
Used to set the input type
and other basic settings.
Press S Key.
*3
Used to display
specified monitor and
setting items.
Press O or
S Key for at least 1 s.
*1
Program Setting
Level
Parameter and
segment settings for
all programs
Press S Key
for at least 1 s.
*1
Press O
Key for at
least 1 s. Press O Key
for less than 1 s.
Press O Key
for less than 1 s.
Press O Key
for less than 1 s.
PID Setting
Level
Parameters for all PID
sets (e.g., PID
constants)
Adjustment parameters
(e.g., PID constants for
current PID set)
Press O Key for
at least 3 s.
*2
Press S Key.
*3
Press O Key for less
than 1 s (only models
with communications).
Press O Key for at
least 1 s.
Communications settings
Release protection and then
enter the password (−169) for
the amoV (Move to Advanced
Function Setting Level)
parameter.
Press O and M Keys
for at least 3 s.
*2
E5@C/E5@C-T
116
Operation
*1 *1
Starting in Manual Mode.
Starting in
Automatic
Mode.
PID
Control
only
PV/MV
Press the O Key less than 1 s.
Press the O and M Keys for
at least 3 s.
Press the O and M Keys
for at least 1 s.
Press the O Key
less than 1 s.
Press the
O Key for
at least 1 s.
Press the O Key for less than 1 s.
Press the
O
Key for at least 3 s.
Other than the Auto/Manual Switch display
Press the
S
Key*2
Press the
S
Key
for at least 1 s.
Press the O
Key or the
S
Key for at least
1 s.
*1. When the PF Setting parameter is set to A-M.
*2. When the PF Setting parameter is set to PFDP.
Press the
S
Key*2
Displayed only for models with
communications. Changes are
effective after cycling power or
after a software reset.
*3. Used with component communications.
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
* Used with programless communications
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
pmsk
on
25
0
C
25
0
l.adj
ins
0.0
rss
0.0
inrt
1.000
rsrt
1.000
c-p
8.0
c-i
233
c-d
40
M
M
M
p
8.0
i
233
d
40
c-db
0.0
of-r
50.0
hys
1.0
chys
1.0
soak
1
wt-b
off
mv-s
0.0
pmov
0
psel
cwf
u-no
1
bps
9.6
len
7
sbit
2
prty
even
sdwt
20
maxu
0
area
0
adrh
0
adrl
0
rwat
1000
unit
0
up 1
1
up13
0
dn 1
31
dn13
75
copy
off
sps
1.000
spos
0.0
oapt
0
icpt
1
wtpt
off
pfpt
off
M
M
chgp
off
M
prlp
0
mv-e
0.0
sprl
same
M
sprt
off
w1on
w2on
w3on
w4of
w5on
w6on
w7on
w8on
w1of
w2of
w3of
w4on
w5of
w6of
w7of
w8of
plcm
0
ol-h
100.0
ol-l
0.0
M
sqrp
0.0
M
oc-h
0.8
at
off
cmwt
off
ct1
0.0
M
spmd
lsp
hb1
0.0
ct2
0.0
hb2
0.0
lcr1
0.0
hs1
50.0
lcr2
0.0
hs2
50.0
sp-0
0
sp-1
0
sp-2
0
sp-3
0
sp-4
0
sp-5
0
sp-6
0
sp-7
0
M
sp-3
0
r-s
run
v-m
in-t
5
in-h
100
in-l
0
dp
0
d-u
c
sl-h
1300
sl-l
-200
cntl
onof
s-hc
stnd
st
on
ptrn
off
cp
20
c-cp
20
orev
or-r
alt1
2
alh1
0.2
al-1
0
al1h
0
al1l
0
al-2
0
al2h
0
al2l
0
al-4
0
al4h
0
al4l
0
M
M
M
al-3
0
al3h
0
al3l
0
o
0.0
c-o
0.0
0.0
25
0
a-m
m-sp
0
sp-m
0
rsp
0.0
ct1
0.0
ct2
0.0
lcr1
0.0
lcr2
0.0
prst
rset
M
sktr
0
M
orl
0.0
M
db
2.0
Power ON
Adjustment
Level
Press the O Key less than 1 s.
Manual Control Level
Adjustment Level
Display
Displayed only
once when
entering
adjustment level.
AT Execute/Cancel
Communications
Writing
Heater Current 1
Value Monitor
Heater Burnout
Detection 1
Heater Current 2
Value Monitor
Heater Burnout
Detection 2
Leakage Current 1
Monitor
Leakage Current 2
Monitor
HS Alarm 1
SP Mode
SP 4
SP 5
SP 6
SP 7
HS Alarm 2
SP 0
SP 1
SP 2
SP 3
Proportional Band
(Cooling)
Integral Time
(Cooling)
Derivative Time
(Cooling)
Process Value Input
Shift
Remote SP Input Shift
Process Value Slope
Coefficient
Remote SP Input
Slope Coefficient
Proportional Band
Integral Time
Derivative Time
Dead Band
SP Ramp Fall Value
Manual Reset Value
Hysteresis (Heating)
Hysteresis (Cooling)
Soak Time
Wait Band
MV at Stop
MV at PV Error
SP Ramp Set Value
MV Upper Limit
MV Lower Limit
MV Change Rate
Limit
Work Bit 1
ON Delay
Work Bit 2
ON Delay
Work Bit 3
ON Delay
Work Bit 4
OFF Delay
Work Bit 5
ON Delay
Work Bit 6
ON Delay
Work Bit 7
ON Delay
Work Bit 8
ON Delay
Work Bit 1
OFF Delay
Work Bit 2
OFF Delay
Work Bit 3
OFF Delay
Work Bit 4
ON Delay
Work Bit 5
OFF Delay
Work Bit 6
OFF Delay
Work Bit 7
OFF Delay
Work Bit 8
OFF Delay
Extraction of
Square Root
Low-cut Point
Press the
O Key
for at
least 3 s.
Process Value/
Set Point 1
Process Value/
Set Point 2
Auto/Manual Switch
Multi-SP
Set Point During
SP Ramp
Heater Current 1 Value
Monitor
Heater Current 2 Value
Monitor
Leakage Current 1
Monitor
Leakage Current 2
Monitor
Program Start
Soak Time Remain
RUN/STOP
Remote SP Monitor
Operation Level
Position
Proportional
Dead Band
Open/Close
Hysteresis
Communications
Monitor
Initial Setting Level
Alarm
Value 1
Alarm Value
Upper Limit
1
Alarm Value
Lower Limit
1
Alarm
Value 2
Alarm Value
Upper Limit
2
Alarm Value
Lower Limit
2
Alarm
Value 3
Alarm Value
Upper Limit
3
Alarm Value
Lower Limit
3
MV Monitor
(Heating)
MV Monitor
(Cooling)
Alarm Value
Upper Limit
4
Alarm Value
Lower Limit
4
Alarm
Value 4
Valve Opening
Monitor
Protect Level
Communications
Setting Level
Move to Protect Level:
Displayed only when a
password is set.
Operation/Adjustment Protect
Initial Setting/Communications
Protect
Setting Change Protect
Password to Move to
Protect Level
PF Key Protect
Parameter Mask Enable
Changed Parameters Only
Protocol Setting:
Switches between
CompoWay/F and
Modbus.
Communications
Unit No.
Communications
Baud Rate
Communications
Data Length
Communications
Stop Bits
Communications
Parity
Send Data Wait
Time
ST (Self-tuning)
Input Type
Scaling Upper Limit
Scaling Lower Limit
Decimal Point
Temperature Unit
SP Upper Limit
SP Lower Limit
PID ON/OFF
Standard or
Heating/Cooling
Program Pattern
Control Period (Heating)
Control Period (Cooling)
Direct/Reverse Operation
Alarm 1 Type
Alarm 1
Hysteresis
Highest
Communications
Unit No.
The time taken to move to the protect level
can be adjusted by changing the "Move to
protect level time" setting.
*3
Area
First Address
Upper Word
First Address
Lower Word
Receive Data
Wait Time
*3
Communications
Node Number
Upload
Setting 1
Upload
Setting 13
Download
Setting 1
Download
Setting 13
Copy
*3
SP Slope
*3
SP Offset
*3
M
Alarm 2 Type
M
alh2
0.2
Alarm 2
Hysteresis
alt2
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Parameters
E5@C
The following pages describe the parameters set in each level. Pressing the M (Mode) Key at the last parameter in each level returns to the top
parameter in that level. Some parameters may not be displayed depending on the model and other settings.
E5@C/E5@C-T
117
SS S S
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
MM
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
25
0
init
off
a1lt
off
a2lt
off
a3lt
off
a4lt
off
prlt
3
a1on
0
a2on
0
a3on
0
a4on
0
a1of
0
a2of
0
a3of
0
a4of
0
mvse
off
amad
off
mant
hold
mani
0.0
rt
off
hsu
on
pf
shft
pfd1
1
pfd2
0
pfd3
0
pfd4
0
pfd5
0
spd1
4
spd2
0
odsl
o
pvdp
on
pvst
off
svst
off
d.ref
0.25
lcmt
0.2
hsl
off
hsh
0.1
lba
0
lbal
8.0
lbab
3.0
out1
o
out2
none
sub1
alm1
sub2
alm2
sub3
alm3
sub4
alm4
alma
49
t-u
m
alsp
sp-m
rs-t
4-20
rspu
off
rsph
1300
rspl
-200
M
M
M
M
M
sptr
off
p-db
0
pvrp
20
hctm
off
ompw
1.0
mspu
off
spru
m
rest
a
sb1n
n-o
sb2n
n-o
sb3n
n-o
sb4n
n-o
hbu
on
hbl
off
hbh
0.1
st-b
15.0
alfa
0.65
tidu
1
at-g
0.8
at-h
0.8
lcma
20.0
inf
0.0
mav
off
M
M
M
M
M
o-dp
off
ret
off
brgt
3
alt4
2
alh4
0.2
M
M
alt3
2
alh3
0.2
tr-t
off
tr-h
100.0
tr-l
0.0
ev-1
msp0
ev-2
stop
ev-3
none
ev-4
none
M
M
ev-5
none
ev-6
none
sqr
off
M
mot
30
M
calb
off
M
clfl
flot
M
o1st
4-20
M
o2st
4-20
M
trst
4-20
amov
0
MMM
M
M
M
cjc
on
M
manl
off
M
pmvd
off
M
PV/SP No. 1 Display
Selection
PV/SP No. 2 Display
Selection
Integral/Derivative
Time Unit
Integrated Alarm
Assignment
Remote SP Input
Remote SP Enable
Remote SP
Upper Limit
Remote SP
Lower Limit
Moving Average Count Manual Output Method
Manual MV Initial Value
Heating/Cooling
Tuning Method
Minimum Output
ON/OFF Band
SP Tracking
Display Brightness
Event Input
Assignment 5
Control Output 1 Signal
Control Output 2 Signal
Transfer Output Signal
Event Input
Assignment 6
RT
Monitor/Setting Item Level
Monitor/Setting
Item Display 1
Note: The monitor/setting items to be displayed is set in the Monitor/Setting Item 1 to 5 parameters (advanced function setting level).
Monitor/Setting
Item Display 2
Monitor/Setting
Item Display 3
Monitor/Setting
Item Display 4
Monitor/Setting
Item Display 5
Press the O Key
for at least 1 s.
Advanced Function Setting Level
Alarm 3 Type
Alarm 3
Hysteresis
Transfer Output Type
Transfer Output
Upper Limit
Transfer Output
Lower Limit
Event Input
Assignment 1
Event Input
Assignment 2
Extraction of Square
Root Enable
Move to Advanced Function
Setting Level:
Displayed when initial
setting/communications
protect is set to 0.
Move by setting password (−169).
Parameter Initialization
Number of Multi-SP
Points
SP Ramp Time Unit
Standby Sequence
Reset
Auxiliary Output 1
Open in Alarm
Auxiliary Output 2
Open in Alarm
Auxiliary Output 3
Open in Alarm
HB ON/OFF
Heater Burnout Latch
Heater Burnout
Hysteresis
ST Stable Range
AT Calculated Gain
α
AT Hysteresis
Limit Cycle MV
Amplitude
Input Digital Filter
MV Display
Automatic Display
Return Time
Alarm 1 Latch
Alarm 2 Latch
Alarm 3 Latch
Move to Protect Level
Time
Cold Junction
Compensation
Method
Alarm 1 ON Delay
Alarm 2 ON Delay
Alarm 3 ON Delay
Alarm 1 OFF Delay
Alarm 2 OFF Delay
Alarm 3 OFF Delay
MV at Stop and Error
Addition
Auto/Manual Select
Addition
HS Alarm Use
HS Alarm Latch
HS Alarm Hysteresis
LBA Detection Time
LBA Level
LBA Band
Control Output 1
Assignment
Control Output 2
Assignment
Auxiliary Output 4
Assignment
(E5EC/E5AC only)
Soak Time Unit
Alarm SP Selection
Manual MV
Limit Enable
PV Rate of Change
Calculation Period
LCT Cooling Output
Minimum ON Time
PF Setting
Monitor/Setting Item 1
Monitor/Setting Item 2
Monitor/Setting Item 3
Monitor/Setting Item 4
Monitor/Setting Item 5
MV Display Selection
PV Decimal Point
Display
PV Status Display
Function
SV Status Display
Function
Display Refresh
Period
Auxiliary Output 4
Open in Alarm
Alarm 4 Latch
Alarm 4 ON Delay
Alarm 4 OFF Delay
Auxiliary Output 1
Assignment
Auxiliary Output 2
Assignment
Auxiliary Output 3
Assignment
Alarm 4 Type
Alarm 4
Hysteresis
Event Input
Assignment 3
Event Input
Assignment 4
Motor Calibration
Close/Floating
Travel Time
PV Dead Band
Direct Setting of
Position Proportional
MV
M
cmov
0
Move to Calibration
Level
o1th
100.0
o1tl
0.0
Simple Transfer
Output 1 Upper Limit
Simple Transfer
Ouptut 1 Lower Limit
E5@C/E5@C-T
118
stb
0.00
psps
0
p
8.0
i
233
wt-b
off
ins
0.0
inrt
1.000
d
40
c-p
8.0
c-i
233
M
c-d
40
l.adj
1234
at
off
cmwt
off
spmd
psp
fsp
0
M
Adjustment Level
Display
Displayed only once
when entering
Adjustment Level.
AT Execute/Cancel
Communications
Writing
SP Mode
Fixed SP
PV Input Shift
PV Input Slope
Coefficient
Wait Band
Standby Time
Program SP Shift Value
Proportional Band
Integral Time
Derivative Time
Proportional Band (Cooling)
Integral Time (Cooling)
Derivative Time (Cooling)
c-db
0.0
Dead Band
ct1
0.0
hb1
0.0
M
Heater Current 1 to 2
Value Monitor
Heater Burnout
Detection 1 to 2
lcr1
0.0
hs1
50.0
M
Leakage Current 1 to 2
Value Monitor
HS Alarm 1 to 2
Adjustment Level
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
rpt
0
link
end
M
pid
1
M
PID Set No.
Display Segment Selection
END or 0 to Number of segments used − 1
d.seg
end
U
Display Program
Selection
Press the U Key
for at least 1 s in
Program SP Mode.
Number of
Segments Used
For end
Program
Repetitions
Program
Link
Destination
Process Value/Set
Point 1 or Process
Value/Set Point 2 in
Operation Level
s-no
8
M
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
d.prg
0
D
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
d.seg
0
al1l
0
al-1
0
al1h
0
M
M
Alarm Value
1 to 4
Alarm
Upper Limit
1 to 4
Alarm
Lower Limit
1 to 4
of1
0.00
M
ts1s
0
on1
0.00
M
M
Time Signal 1 to 2
Set Segment
Time Signal 1 to 2
ON Time
Time Signal 1 to 2
OFF Time
25
0
U
D
U
D
Program Setting Level
styp
ramp
Segment n Format
sp
0
Segment n SP
pr
0
Segment n Slope
time
0.00
Segment n Time
M
M
For 0 to 7
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
1.c-d
40
1.cdb
0.0
1.ofr
s0.0
1.olh
100.0
1.oll
0.0
1.aut
1320
1.lba
0
M
1.p
8.0
1.i
233
1.d
40
1.c-p
8.0
1.c-i
233
PID 1
Proportional
Band
PID 1 Integral
Time
PID 1
Derivative Time
PID 1
Proportional
Band (Cooling)
PID 1 Integral
Time (Cooling)
PID 1
Derivative Time
(Cooling)
PID 1 Dead
Band
PID 1 Manual
Reset Value
PID 1 MV Upper
Limit
PID 1 MV Lower
Limit
PID 1 Automatic
Selection Range
Upper Limit
PID 1 LBA
Detection
Time
M
M
PID Setting Level
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
Display PID
Selection
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
d.pid
1
U
D
hold
off
ct1
0.0
pgsg
0.00
prg
0
a-m
lcr1
0.0
o
0.0
c-o
0.0
r-r
rst
25
0
25
0
v-m
0.0
M
seg
0
stbm
0.00
prgt
0.00
rptm
0
Process
Value/Set Point 1
Process
Value/Set Point 2
Auto/Manual Switch
Program No. Monitor/
Segment No. Monitor
Program Number
Hold
Segment Number
Remaining
Standby Time
Monitor
Heater Current 1 to
2 Value Monitor
Leakage Current 1
to 2 Value Monitor
MV Monitor
(Heating)
MV Monitor
(Cooling)
Valve Opening
Monitor
Elapsed
Program Time
Monitor
Program Execution
Repetitions Monitor
Run/Reset
(of the program)
Operation Level
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
25
50.0
PV/Manual MV
Manual Control Level
Press O Key for
at least 3 s while
a-m is displayed.
Press O or S
Key for at least
1 s.
*1
Press S
Key for at
least 1 s.
*1
S
* The monitor/setting items to display are set in the Monitor/Setting Item 1 to 5 parameters
(Advanced Function Setting Level).
PF Monitor/Setting
Item display 2 to 5
Monitor/Setting Item Level
25
0
PF Monitor/
Setting Item
display 1
Press O Key for less than 1 s.
Press O Key for less than 1 s.
Press S Key.
*2
Press S Key.
*2
Starting in manual mode
Power ON
Press O
Key for
less than
1 s.
Press O
Key for less
than 1 s.
E5@C-T
Some parameters may not be displayed depending on the model and other settings.
E5@C/E5@C-T
119
ol-h
100.0
ol-l
0.0
orl
0.0
db
2.0
oc-h
0.8
sqrp
0.0
of-r
50.0
hys
1.0
chys
1.0
mv-r
0.0
mv-e
0.0
Manual Reset Value
Hysteresis (Heating)
Hysteresis (Cooling)
MV at Reset
MV at PV Error
MV Upper Limit
MV Lower Limit
MV Change Rate
Limit
Position Proportional
Dead Band
Open/Close
Hysteresis
Extraction of Square
Root Low-cut Point
plcm
0
M
Communications
Monitor
Work Bit 1 to 8 OFF
Delay
Work Bit 1 to 8 ON
Delay
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
w1on
0
w1of
0
M
Parameter Mask Enable
Initial Setting/
Communications Protect
Setting Change Protect Password to Move
to Protect Level
PF Key Protect
pmsk
on
pmov
0
oapt
0
icpt
1
wtpt
off
pfpt
off
prlp
0
Protect Level
Move to Protect Level
Operation/Adjustment
Protect
MM
M
M
M
M
M
s-hc
stnd
cp
20
c-cp
20
orev
or-r
sl-l
-200
t-u
h-m
t-pr
time
pru
m
rtsm
stop
p-on
cont
eset
rst
cntl
pid
pvst
sp
tspu
0
M
in-t
5
in-h
100
in-l
0
dp
0
d-u
c
sl-h
1300
Scaling Upper Limit
Scaling Lower Limit
Decimal Point
Temperature
Unit
SP Upper Limit
SP Lower Limit
Program Time Unit
Step Time/Rate of
Rise Programming
Time Unit of Ramp
Rate
Reset Operation
Startup Operation
Operation End
Operation
PV Start
All PID AT Upper
Limit SP
PID ON/OFF
Standard or
Heating/Cooling
Control Period
(Heating)
Control Period
(Cooling)
Direct/Reverse
Operation
trst
4-20
tr-t
off
tr-h
100.0
tr-l
0.0
ev-1
rr-1
clfl
flot
calb
off
mot
30
vl-c
0
Transfer Output
Signal
Transfer Output
Type
Transfer Output
Upper Limit
Transfer Output
Lower Limit
Event Input
Assignment 1
Close/Floating
Motor Calibration
Travel Time
Valve Completely
Closed Position
vl-o
9999
pms
0
sqr
off
amov
0
Valve Completely
Open Position
Potentiometer
Specification Setting
Extraction of
Square Root
Enable
Moves to Advanced
Function Setting
Level
Input Type
alt1
2
alh1
0.2
M
Alarm 1 to 4
Type
Alarm 1 to 4
Hysteresis
o1st
4-20
Control output
1 to 2 Signal
Initial Setting Level
Enter password (−169)
to move.
M
M
M
MM
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
ev-2
adv
Event Input
Assignment 2
ev-3
none
Event Input
Assignment 3
to 6
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
MM
M
*1 When PF Setting = A-M.
*2 When PF Setting = PFDP.
Models with communications only: Changes to settings are applied
when the power is cycled or a software reset is performed.
Protocol Setting
Communications
Unit No.
Communications
Baud Rate
Communications
Data Length
Communications
Stop Bits
Communications
Parity
Send Data
Wait Time
psel
cwf
u-no
1
M
bps
9.6
len
7
sbit
2
sdwt
20
Communications Setting Level
M
M
M
M
M
Highest
Communications
Unit No.
Area
First Address
Upper Word
First Address
Lower Word
Receive Data
Wait Time
Communications
Node Number
Upload
Setting
1 to 23
Download
Setting
1 to 43
Copy
M
maxu
0
area
0
adrh
0
adrl
0
rwat
1000
unit
0
up 1
0
copy
off
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
dn 1
0
prty
even
Press O Key for less than 1 s.
Press O + M Key for at least 1 s.
Press O Key
for at least 1 s.
Press
O
Key
for at least 3 s.
Press
O
Key
for at least 1 s.
Press O Key
for at least 3 s.
Press O + M Key for at least 3 s. (The key pressing
time can be changed in the Move to Protect Level
Time parameter (Advanced Function Setting Level).)
Press O + M Key
for at least 3 s.
E5@C/E5@C-T
120
Advanced Function Setting Level
Alarm 1 to 4 Latch
HS Alarm Latch
HS Alarm Hysteresis
LBA Detection Time
LBA Level
LBA Band
Control Output 1
Assignment
HS Alarm Use
Parameter Initialization
Heater Burnout Latch
Program End ON Time
Standby Time Unit
Standby Sequence Reset
Auxiliary Output 1 to 4
Open in Alarm
Heater Burnout Hysteresis
HB ON/OFF PF Setting
PF Monitor/Setting Item 1
PF Monitor/
Setting Item 2 to 5
PV/SP No. 1
Display Selection
PV Status Display Function
SV Status Display Function
PV/SP No. 2
Display Selection
Parameter Mask Setting
Input Digital Filter
α
Integral/Derivative Time Unit
AT Calculated Gain
AT Hysteresis
Limit Cycle MV Amplitude
Alarm SP Selection
Moving Average Count
Manual Output Method
Manual MV Initial Value
RT
Display Refresh Period
init
a1lt
mant
mani
rt
hsu
pf
pfd1
pfd2
spd1
spd2
pvst
svst
d.ref
pmst
hsl
hsh
lba
lbal
lbab
out1
alsp
PV Dead Band
Heating/Cooling Tuning
Method
PV Rate of Change
Calculation Period
Minimum Output ON/OFF
Band
PID Set Automatic
Selection Hysteresis
pidh
p-db
pvrp
hctm
ompw
pend
s-u
rest
sb1n
hbu
hbl
hbh
alfa
tidu
at-g
at-h
lcma
inf
mav
Automatic Display
Return Time
Display Brightness
ret
brgt
Manual MV Limit Enable
manl
Direct Setting of Position
Proportional MV
pmvd
Burnout Method
burn
off
off
hold
0.0
off
on
shft
1
0
6
7
off
off
0.25
off
Move to Calibration Level
cmov
0
off
0.1
0
8.0
3.0
o
sp-m
0.50
PID Set Automatic
Selection Data
pidi
pv
SP Tracking
sptr
off
0
20
0
1.0
LCT Cooling Output Min.
ON Time
lcmt
0.2
0.0
h-m
a
n-o
on
off
0.1
0.65
1
0.8
0.8
20.0
0.0
off
off
3
off
off
up
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
Move to Protect Level Time
Alarm 1 to 4 ON Delay
Alarm 1 to 4 OFF Delay
prlt
a1on
a1of
Cold Junction
Compensation Method
cjc
3
0
0
on
M
M
M
Control Output 2
Assignment
Auxiliary Output 1
Assignment
Auxiliary Output 2
Assignment
Auxiliary Output 3
Assignment
Auxiliary Output 4
Assignment
Integrated Alarm
Assignment
out2
sub1
sub2
sub3
sub4
alma
none
alm1
alm2
alm3
alm4
49
M
M
M
M
M
M
E5@C/E5@C-T
121
Error Displays (Troubleshooting)
When an error occurs, the No. 1 display or No. 2 display shows the error code.
Take necessary measure according to the error code, referring the following table.
Display Name Meaning Action Operation
s.err Input error
The input value exceeded the control
range.*
The input type is not set correctly.
The sensor is disconnected or short-
circuited.
The sensor is not wired correctly.
The sensor is not wired.
* Control Range
Temperature resistance
thermometer or thermocouple input:
SP Lower Limit - 20°C to SP Upper
Limit + 20°C
(SP Lower Limit - 40°F to SP Upper
Limit + 40°F)
ESIB input:
Same as specified input range.
Analog input:
Scaling range -5% to 105%
Check the wiring for input to be sure
it is wired correctly, not broken, and
not shorted. Also check the input
type.
If there are no problems in the wiring
or input type settings, cycle the
power supply.
If the display remains the same,
replace the Digital Temperature
Controller.
If the display is restored to normal,
then the probable cause is external
noise affecting the control system.
Check for external noise.
Note: For a temperature resistance
thermometer, the input is
considered disconnected if
the A, B, or B’ line is broken.
After the error occurs and it is
displayed, the alarm output will operate
as if the upper limit was exceeded.
It will also operate as if transfer
output exceeded the upper limit.
If an input error is assigned to a
control output or auxiliary output, the
output will turn ON when the input
error occurs.
The error message will appear in the
display for the PV.
Note: 1.
The heating and cooling
control outputs will turn OFF.
2. When the manual MV, MV
at stop, MV at reset, or MV
at error is set, the control
output is determined by the
set value.
[[[[
Display
range
exceeded
Below -1,999
This is not an error. It
is displayed when the
control range is wider
than the display range
and the PV exceeds
the display range.
The PV is displayed
for the range that is
given on the left (the
number without the
decimal point).
-
Control continues and operation is
normal.
The value will appear in the display
for the PV.
Refer to the E5
@
C Digital Temperature
Controllers User’s Manual (Cat. No.
H174) or the E5
@
C-T Digital
Temperature Controllers
Programmable Type User’s Manual
(Cat. No. H185) for information on the
controllable range.
]]]] Above 9,999
e333
A/D
converter
error
There is an error in the internal
circuits.
After checking the input error, turn
the power OFF then back ON again.
If the display remains the same, the
controller must be repaired.
If the display is restored to normal,
then a probable cause can be
external noise affecting the control
system. Check for external noise.
The control outputs, auxiliary
outputs, and transfer outputs turn
OFF. (A current output will be approx.
0 mA and a linear voltage output will
be approx. 0V.)
e111 Memory
error
There is an error in the internal
memory operation.
First, cycle the power supply.
If the display remains the same, the
controller must be repaired.
If the display is restored to normal,
then a probable cause can be
external noise affecting the control
system. Check for external noise.
The control outputs, auxiliary
outputs, and transfer outputs turn
OFF. (A current output will be approx.
0 mA and a linear voltage output will
be approx. 0V.)
ffff Overcurrent This error is displayed when the peak
current exceeds 55.0 A. -
Control continues and operation is
normal.
The error message will appear for the
following displays.
Heater Current Value 1 Monitor
Heater Current Value 2 Monitor
Leakage Current Value 1 Monitor
Leakage Current Value 2 Monitor
ct1
ct2
lcr1
lcr2
HB or HS
alarm
If there is a HB or HS alarm, the No.
1 display will flash in the relevant
setting level.
-
The No. 1 display for the following
parameter flashes in Operation Level
or Adjustment Level.
Heater Current Value 1 Monitor
Heater Current Value 2 Monitor
Leakage Current Value 1 Monitor
Leakage Current Value 2 Monitor
However, control continues and
operation is normal.
----
Potentiometer
Input Error
(Position-
proportional
Models Only)
"----" will be displayed for the Valve
Opening Monitor parameter if any of
the following error occurs.
• Motor calibration has not been
performed.
• The wiring of the potentiometer is
incorrect or broken.
• The potentiometer input value is
incorrect (e.g., the input is out of
range or the potentiometer has
failed).
Check for the above errors.
Close control: The control output is
OFF or the value that is set for the
MV at PV Error parameter is output.
Floating control: Operation will be
normal.
E5@C/E5@C-T
122
Safety Precautions
Be sure to read the precautions for all E5
@
C/E5
@
C-T models in the website at: http://www.ia.omron.com/.
Warning Indications
Meaning of Product Safety Symbols
Do not touch the terminals while power is being
supplied.
Doing so may occasionally result in minor injury due
to electric shock.
Electric shock may occur. Do not touch any cables or
connectors with wet hands.
Minor electric shock, fire, or malfunction may
occasionally occur. Do not allow any metal,
conductors, chips from mounting work, or water to
enter the interior of the Digital Controller, the Setting
Tool port, or between the pins on the Setting Tool cable
connector.
If you do not use the Setting Tool port on the front panel, close
the cover securely so that the above foreign matter does not
enter.
Do not use the Digital Temperature Controller where
subject to flammable or explosive gas. Otherwise,
minor injury from explosion may occasionally occur.
Not doing so may occasionally result in fire. Do not
allow dirt or other foreign objects to enter the Setup
Tool port or ports, or between the pins on the
connectors on the Setup Tool cable.
Minor electric shock or fire may occasionally occur.
Do not use any cables that are damaged.
Never disassemble, modify, or repair the product or
touch any of the internal parts. Minor electric shock,
fire, or malfunction may occasionally occur.
CAUTION - Risk of Fire and Electric Shock
1. This product is UL listed *1 as Open Type Process
Control Equipment. It must be mounted in an
enclosure that does not allow fire to escape externally.
2. More than one disconnect switch may be required to
de-energize the equipment before servicing the product.
3. Signal inputs are SELV, limited energy. *2
4. Caution: To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not
interconnect the outputs of different Class 2 circuits. *3
If the output relays are used past their life expectancy,
contact fusing or burning may occasionally occur.
Always consider the application conditions and use
the output relays within their rated load and electrical
life expectancy. The life expectancy of output relays varies
considerably with the output load and switching conditions.
Even if you replace only the Main Unit of the E5DC/
E5DC-B, check the condition of the Terminal Unit.
If corroded terminals are used, contact failure in the
terminals may cause the temperature inside the Digital
Temperature Controller to increase, possibly resulting in fire.
If the terminals are corroded, replace the Terminal Unit as well.
Tighten the terminal screws to the rated torque of
between 0.43 and 0.58 N•m. *4
Loose screws may occasionally result in fire.
Set the parameters of the product so that they are
suitable for the system being controlled. If they are
not suitable, unexpected operation may occasionally
result in property damage or accidents.
A malfunction in the product may occasionally make
control operations impossible or prevent alarm
outputs, resulting in property damage.
To maintain safety in the event of malfunction of the
product, take appropriate safety measures, such as installing a
monitoring device on a separate line.
*1. E5CC, E5EC, E5AC, and E5DC Digital Temperature Controllers
that were shipped through November 2013 are UL recognized.
*2. An SELV (separated extra-low voltage) system is one with a
power supply that has double or reinforced insulation between the
primary and the secondary circuits and has an output voltage of
30 V r.m.s. max. and 42.4 V peak max. or 60 VDC max.
*3. A class 2 circuit is one tested and certified by UL as having the
current and voltage of the secondary output restricted to specific
levels.
*4. The specified torque is 0.5 N·m for the E5CC-U.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, may
result in minor or moderate injury or in
property damage.
Precautions for
Safe Use
Supplementary comments on what to
do or avoid doing, to use the product
safely.
Precautions for
Correct Use
Supplementary comments on what to
do or avoid doing, to prevent failure to
operate, malfunction or undesirable
effect on product performance.
Used to warn of the risk of electric shock under
specific conditions.
Used for general prohibitions for which there is no
specific symbol.
Used to indicate prohibition when there is a risk of
minor injury from electrical shock or other source
if the product is disassembled.
Used for general CAUTION, WARNING, or
DANGER precautions for which there is no
specified symbol. (This symbol is also used as the
alerting symbol, but shall not be used in this
meaning on the product.)
Used for general mandatory action precautions
for which there is no specified symbol.
CAUTION
E5@C/E5@C-T
123
Be sure to observe the following precautions to prevent malfunction
or adverse affects on the performance or functionality of the product.
Not doing so may occasionally result in faulty operation. Do not
handle the Digital Temperature Controller in ways that exceed the
ratings.
1. This product is specifically designed for indoor use only.
Do not use this product in the following places:
• Places directly subject to heat radiated from heating equipment.
• Places subject to splashing liquid or oil atmosphere.
• Places subject to direct sunlight.
• Places subject to dust or corrosive gas (in particular, sulfide gas
and ammonia gas).
• Places subject to intense temperature change.
• Places subject to icing and condensation.
• Places subject to vibration and large shocks.
2. Use and store the product within the rated ambient temperature
and humidity.
Gang-mounting two or more Digital Temperature Controllers, or
mounting Digital Temperature Controllers above each other may
cause heat to build up inside the Digital Temperature Controllers,
which will shorten their service life. In such a case, use forced
cooling by fans or other means of air ventilation to cool down the
Digital Temperature Controllers.
3. To allow heat to escape, do not block the area around the Digital
Temperature Controller.
Do not block the ventilation holes on the Digital Temperature
Controller.
4. Be sure to wire properly with correct signal name and polarity of
terminals.
5. Use copper stranded or solid wires to connect bare wires.
Recommended Wire
*1. Please use Ferrules with UL certification (R/C).
Use the specified size of crimped terminals to wire the E5CC,
E5EC, E5AC, E5DC, and E5GC (models with screw terminal
blocks) and the E5@C-T and E5CC-U (plug-in models).
Recommended Crimped Terminal Size
For the E5@C-B(Push-In Plus model), connect only one wire to
each terminal.
For other models, up to two wires of same size and type, or two
crimp terminals, can be inserted into a single terminal.
When connecting two wires to one terminal on an E5GC Digital
Temperature Controller with a screwless clamp terminal blocks,
use two crimped ferrules with a diameter of 0.8 to 1.4 mm and an
exposed conductor length of 8 to 12 mm. *2
*2. The E5GC Digital Temperature Controller with screwless
clamp terminal blocks underwent UL testing with one braided
wire connected.
6. Do not wire the terminals that are not used.
7. Use a commercial power supply for the power supply voltage input
to a Digital Temperature Controller with AC input specifications.
Do not use the output from an inverter as the power supply.
Depending on the output characteristics of the inverter,
temperature increases in the Digital Temperature Controller may
cause smoke or fire damage even if the inverter has a specified
output frequency of 50/60 Hz.
8. To avoid inductive noise, keep the wiring for the product’s terminal
block away from power cables carry high voltages or large
currents. Also, do not wire power lines together with or parallel to
product wiring. Using shielded cables and using separate conduits
or ducts is recommended.
Attach a surge suppressor or noise filter to peripheral devices that
generate noise (in particular, motors, transformers, solenoids,
magnetic coils, or other equipment that have an inductance
component).
When a noise filter is used at the power supply, first check the
voltage or current, and attach the noise filter as close as possible
to the product.
Allow as much space as possible between the product and
devices that generate powerful high frequencies (high-frequency
welders, high-frequency sewing machines, etc.) or surge.
9. Use this product within the rated load and power supply.
10.Make sure that the rated voltage is attained within two seconds of
turning ON the power using a switch or relay contact. If the voltage
is applied gradually, the power may not be reset or output
malfunctions may occur.
11.Make sure that the Digital Temperature Controller has 30 minutes
or more to warm up after turning ON the power before starting
actual control operations to ensure the correct temperature
display.
12.When executing self-tuning with E5@C, turn ON power to the load
(e.g., heater) at the same time as or before supplying power to the
product. If power is turned ON to the product before turning ON
power to the load, self-tuning will not be performed properly and
optimum control will not be achieved.
13.A switch or circuit breaker must be provided close to the product.
The switch or circuit breaker must be within easy reach of the
operator, and must be marked as a disconnecting means for this
unit.
14.Use a soft and dry cloth to clean the product carefully. Do not use
organic solvent, such as paint thinner, benzine or alcohol to clean
the product.
15.Design the system (e.g., control panel) considering the 2 seconds
of delay that the product's output to be set after power ON.
16.The output may turn OFF when you move to the initial setting level.
Take this into consideration when performing control operations.
17.The number of non-volatile memory write operations is limited.
Therefore, use RAM write mode when frequently overwriting data
during communications or other operations.
18.Always touch a grounded piece of metal before touching the
Digital Temperature Controller to discharge static electricity from
your body.
19.Use suitable tools when taking the Digital Temperature Controller
apart for disposal. Sharp parts inside the Digital Temperature
Controller may cause injury.
20.For compliance with Lloyd’s standards, the E5CC, E5CC-B,
E5EC-B, E5CC-U, E5EC, E5AC, and E5DC must be installed
under the conditions that are specified in Shipping Standards.
21.For the Digital Temperature Controller with two Setup Tool ports
(E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC/E5DC/E5DC-B/E5GC), do not connect
cables to both ports at the same time. The Digital Temperature
Controller may be damaged or may malfunction.
22.Do not place heavy object on the Conversion Cable, bend the
cable past its natural bending radius, or pull on the cable with
undue force. The Digital Temperature Controller may be
damaged.
Precautions for Safe Use
Model Wire Size Wire Stripping length
E5CC/E5EC/
E5AC/E5DC/
E5@C-T/E5GC
(Controllers with
Screw Terminal
Blocks) AWG24 to AWG18
(0.21 to 0.82mm
2
)
6 to 8 mm
E5GC
(Controllers with
Screwless Clamp
Terminal Blocks)
8 to 12 mm
E5CC-U
(Plug-in model)
AWG24 to 14
(0.21 to
2.08mm2
)
5 to 6 mm
E5@C-B
(Controllers with
Push-In Plus
Terminal Blocks)
0.25 to
1.5mm2
Equivalent to
AWG24 to 16
Ferrules used: 10 mm *1
Ferrules not used: 8 mm
Model Wire Size
E5CC/E5EC/E5AC/E5DC/E5
@
C-T/
E5GC
(Controllers with Screw
Terminal Blocks)
M3, Width: 5.8 mm max.
E5CC-U (Plug-in model) M3.5, Width: 7.2 mm max.
E5@C/E5@C-T
124
23.Do not disconnect the Communications Conversion Cable or the
USB-Serial Conversion Cable while communications are in
progress. Damage or malfunction may occur.
24.Do not touch the external power supply terminals or other metal
parts on the Digital Temperature Controller.
25.Do not exceed the communications distance that is given in the
specifications and use the specified communications cable. Refer
to the E5@C Digital Temperature Controllers User’s Manual (Cat.
No. H174) for information on the communications distances and
cables for the E5@C.
For details on the E5@C-T, refer to the E5
@
C-T Digital
Temperature Controllers Programmable Type User’s Manual (Cat.
No. H185).
26.Do not bend the communications cables past their natural bending
radius. Do not pull on the communications cables.
27.Do not turn the power supply to the Digital Temperature Controller
ON or OFF while the USB-Serial Conversion Cable is connected.
The Digital Temperature Controller may malfunction.
28.Make sure that the indicators on the USB-Serial Conversion Cable
are operating properly. Depending on the application conditions,
deterioration in the connectors and cable may be accelerated, and
normal communications may become impossible. Perform
periodic inspection and replacement.
29.Connectors may be damaged if they are inserted with excessive
force. When connecting a connector, always make sure that it is
oriented correctly. Do not force the connector if it does not connect
smoothly.
30.Noise may enter on the USB-Serial Conversion Cable, possibly
causing equipment malfunctions. Do not leave the USB-Serial
Conversion Cable connected constantly to the equipment.
31.For the E5DC/E5DC-B, when you attach the Main Unit to the
Terminal Unit, make sure that the hooks on the Main Unit are
securely inserted into the Terminal Unit.
32.For the E5CC-U, when you attach the Main Unit to the socket,
make sure that the hooks on the socket are securely inserted into
the Main Unit.
33.Install the DIN Track vertically to the ground.
34.For the E5DC/E5DC-B, always turn OFF the power supply before
connecting the Main Unit to or disconnecting the Main Unit from
the Terminal Unit, and never touch nor apply shock to the
terminals or electronic components. When connecting or
disconnecting the Main Unit, do not allow the electronic
components to touch the case.
35.Observe the following precautions when you remove the terminal
block or pulling out the interior of the product of the E5GC.
• Always follow the instructions provided in the E5@C Digital
Temperature Controllers User’s Manual (Cat. No. H174).
• Turn OFF the power supply before you start and never touch nor
apply shock to the terminals or electric components. When you
insert the interior body of the Digital Temperature Controller, do
not allow the electronic components to touch the case.
• Check for any corrosion on the terminals.
• When you insert the interior body into the rear case, confirm that
the hooks on the top and bottom are securely engaged with the
case.
36.Observe the following precautions when you wire the E5@C-B.
• Always follow the wiring instructions provided in Wiring
Precautions for E5
@
C-B (Controllers with Push-In Plus
Terminal Blocks) on page 133.
• Do not wire anything to the release holes.
• Do not tilt or twist a flat-blade screwdriver while it is inserted into
a release hole on the terminal block. The terminal block may be
damaged.
• Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the release holes at an angle.
The terminal block may be damaged if you insert the
screwdriver straight in.
• Do not allow the flat-blade screwdriver to fall out while it is
inserted into a release hole.
• Do not bend a wire past its natural bending radius or pull on it
with excessive force. Doing so may cause the wire to break.
• Do not use crossover wiring except for the input power supply
and communications.
• Do not use crossover wiring for the E5CC-B/E5EC-B except for
the input power supply and communications.
Do not use crossover wiring for the E5DC-B.
The E5CC, E5CC-B, E5CC-U, E5EC, E5EC-B, E5AC, and E5DC
comply with Lloyd's standards. When applying the standards, the
following installation requirements must be met in the application.
Also insert the Waterproof Packing on the backside of the front panel.
Application Conditions
Installation Location
The E5CC, E5CC-B, E5CC-U, E5EC, E5EC-B, E5AC, and E5DC
comply with installation category ENV1 and ENV2 of Lloyd's
standards. Therefore, they must be installed in a location equipped
with air conditioning. They cannot be used on the bridge or decks, or
in a location subject to strong vibration.
Service Life
1.
Use the product within the following temperature and humidity ranges:
Temperature: -10 to 55°C (with no icing or condensation)
Humidity: 25% to 85%
If the product is installed inside a control board, the ambient
temperature must be kept to under 55°C, including the temperature
around the product.
2.
The service life of electronic devices like Digital Temperature
Controllers is determined not only by the number of times the relay is
switched but also by the service life of internal electronic components.
Component service life is affected by the ambient temperature: the
higher the temperature, the shorter the service life and, the lower
the temperature, the longer the service life. Therefore, the service
life can be extended by lowering the temperature of the Digital
Temperature Controller.
3. When two or more Digital Temperature Controllers are mounted
horizontally close to each other or vertically next to one another,
the internal temperature will increase due to heat radiated by the
Digital Temperature Controllers and the service life will decrease.
In such a case, use forced cooling by fans or other means of air
ventilation to cool down the Digital Temperature Controllers. When
providing forced cooling, however, be careful not to cool down the
terminals sections alone to avoid measurement errors.
Shipping Standards
Precautions for Correct Use
E5@C/E5@C-T
125
Measurement Accuracy
1.
When extending or connecting the thermocouple lead wire, be sure to
use compensating wires that match the thermocouple types.
2.
When extending or connecting the lead wire of the platinum resistance
thermometer, be sure to use wires that have low resistance and keep
the resistance of the three lead wires the same.
3. Mount the product so that it is horizontally level.
4. If the measurement accuracy is low, check to see if input shift has
been set correctly.
Waterproofing (Not applicable to the E5CC-U/
E5DC/E5DC-B.)
The degree of protection is as shown below. Sections without any
specification on their degree of protection or those with IP@0 are not
waterproof.
Front panel: IP66, Rear case: IP20, Terminal section: IP00
When waterproofing is required, insert the Waterproof Packing on the
backside of the front panel. Keep the Port Cover on the front-panel
Setup Tool port of the E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC/E5EC-T/E5AC-T
securely closed. The degree of protection when the Waterproof
Packing is used is IP66. To maintain an IP66 degree of protection, the
Waterproof Packing and the Port Cover for the front-panel Setup Tool
port must be periodically replaced because they may deteriorate,
shrink, or harden depending on the operating environment. The
replacement period will vary with the operating environment. Check
the required period in the actual application. Use 3 years or sooner as
a guideline.
Operating Precautions
1. When using self-tuning, turn ON power for the load (e.g., heater)
at the same time as or before supplying power to the Digital
Temperature Controller. If power is turned ON for the Digital
Temperature Controller before turning ON power for the load, self-
tuning will not be performed properly and optimum control will not
be achieved.
When starting operation after the Digital Temperature Controller
has warmed up, turn OFF the power and then turn it ON again at
the same time as turning ON power for the load. (Instead of turning
the Digital Temperature Controller OFF and ON again, switching
from STOP mode to RUN mode can also be used.)
2. Avoid using the Digital Temperature Controller in places near a
radio, television set, or wireless installing. These devices can
cause radio disturbances which adversely affect the performance
of the Controller.
Others
1. Do not Connect or disconnect the Conversion Cable connector
repeatedly over a short period of time.
The computer may malfunction.
2. After connecting the Conversion Cable to the computer, check the
COM port number before starting communications. The computer
requires time to recognize the cable connection. This delay does
not indicate failure.
3. Do not connect the Conversion Cable through a USB hub. Doing
so may damage the Conversion Cable.
4. Do not use an extension cable to extend the Conversion Cable
length when connecting to the computer. Doing so may damage
the Conversion Cable.
5. Wiring
When linking the units together, connect the power cable only to
the unit at the left end of the linkage block. Incorrect wiring can be
shorted inside the unit resulting in damage to the unit. Do not
perform crossover wiring between each linkage block, or to
another device. This could result in a breakdown or incorrect
operation.
6. When N units are linked together, the inrush current will be equal
to N times that for 1 unit. Be sure to use the external fuse with the
appropriate fusing characteristics, and the breaker with the
appropriate tripping characteristics to ensure that the fuse does
not melt and the breaker is not activated due to the inrush current.
The inrush current per Unit is 30 A or less.
7. Do not remove the connector cover from connectors that are not
to be linked. The connector covers have been mounted on the
product during shipment.
8. Do not add or separate the units during power-on.
Mounting
Mounting to a Panel
E5GC
1. For waterproof mounting, waterproof packing must be installed on
the Digital Temperature Controller. Waterproofing is not possible
when group mounting several Digital Temperature Controllers.
2. Insert the E5GC into the mounting hole in the panel.
3. Use two Mounting Adapters, either on the top and bottom or on the
right and left.
4. Push the Adapters from the terminals up to the panel, and
temporarily fasten the E5GC.
5. Tighten the two fastening screws on the Adapter. Alternately
tighten the two screws little by little to maintain a balance. Tighten
the screws to a torque of 0.29 to 0.39 N·m.
Prohibited Multiplex
Power Input Wirin
Incorrect Incorrect
Prohibited Crossover Wiring
Panel
Waterproof
Packing
Adapter
E5@C/E5@C-T
126
E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U/E5CC-T
• E5CC/E5CC-T
There are two models of Terminal Covers that you can use with the
E5CC/E5CC-T.
• E5CC-U
For the Wiring Socket for the E5CC-U, purchase the P2CF-11 or
PG3A-11 separately.
1. For waterproof mounting, waterproof packing must be installed on
the Digital Temperature Controller. Waterproofing is not possible
when group mounting several Digital Temperature Controllers.
The E5CC-U cannot be waterproofed even if the Waterproof
Packing is inserted.
2. Insert the E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U/E5CC-T into the mounting hole
in the panel.
3. Push the adapter from the terminals up to the panel, and
temporarily fasten the E5CC/E5CC-B/E5CC-U/E5CC-T.
4. Tighten the two fastening screws on the adapter.
Alternately tighten the two screws little by little to maintain a
balance. Tighten the screws to a torque of 0.29 to 0.39 N·m.
E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC/E5EC-T/E5AC-T
1. For waterproof mounting, waterproof packing must be installed on
the Digital Temperature Controller. Waterproofing is not possible
when group mounting several Digital Temperature Controllers.
2. Insert the E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC/E5EC-T/E5AC-T into the
mounting hole in the panel.
3. Push the adapter from the terminals up to the panel, and
temporarily fasten the E5EC/E5EC-B/E5AC/E5EC-T/E5AC-T.
4. Tighten the two fastening screws on the adapter.
Alternately tighten the two screws little by little to maintain a
balance. Tighten the screws to a torque of 0.29 to 0.39 N·m.
E5DC/E5DC-B
1. Insert the E5DC/E5DC-B into the mounting hole in the panel.
(Attach the Terminal Unit after you insert the Main Unit.)
2. Push the Adapter from the Terminal Unit up to the panel, and
temporarily fasten the E5DC/E5DC-B.
3. Tighten the two fastening screws on the Adapter. Alternately
tighten the two screws little by little to maintain a balance. Tighten
the screws to a torque of 0.29 to 0.39 N·m.
E5DC
Mounting to and Removing from DIN Track
• Mounting a Unit
Pull down the DIN Track hook on the Terminal Unit and catch the
top hook on the DIN Track.
Press the Unit onto the DIN Track until the DIN Track hooks are
locked in place.
• Removing a Unit
Pull down on the DIN Track Hook with a flat-blade screwdriver and
lift up the Unit.
Panel
Water Proof Packing
Terminal Cover
(E53-COV17)
(Sold separately)
Adapter
Terminal Cover
(E53-COV23)
Adapter
Adapter
Panel
Water Proof Packing
Terminal Cover
(E53-COV24)
Terminal Cover
(E53-COV24)
Main Unit
Panel
Terminal Unit
Adapter
1. Pull down the hook.
2. Catch the top hook on
the DIN Track.
4. Make sure that the hooks
are locked in place.
3. Press the Unit onto
the DIN Track.
E5@C/E5@C-T
127
Removing the Main Unit
Press in the two hooks on the Main Unit and remove the Main Unit
from the Terminal Unit.
End Plate Installation
Make sure to attach PFP-M End Plates to the ends of the Units.
E5DC-B
Mounting to and Removing from DIN Track
• Mounting a Unit
Mount the Main Unit after first mounting the Terminal Unit on the
DIN Track.
• Removing a Unit
Pull down on the DIN Track Hook with a flat-blade screwdriver and
lift up the Unit.
Removing the Main Unit
End Plate Installation
Make sure to attach PFP-M End Plates to the ends of the Units.
Mounting to a DIN Track in Connection
1. Remove the connector cover on the side to use for connecting to
another terminal unit, and attach the unit to the DIN Track.
2. Connect the terminal unit connector to the next unit.
3. Wire the terminal units.
4. Insert the main units into the terminal units.
(1)
(1)
(2)
Individual
Mounting
Group Mounting
A
B
(1) Pull down the hook.
(2) Catch the top hook
on the DIN Track.
(3) Press the Unit
onto the DIN
Track.
(4) Make sure that the
hooks are locked
in place.
(1)
(1) Push in the hooks.
(2) Pull out the Main Unit.
Individual
Mounting Group Mounting
(1)
(2)
Connector Cover (Accessory)
Left side
End Plate
(1)
(2)
(4)
(3)
E5@C/E5@C-T
128
Removing from the DIN Track
1. Remove the Main Unit from the Terminal Unit.
2. Remove the Terminal Units.
3. Remove the Terminal Units from the DIN Track.
Mounting to a Panel in Connection
1. Insert the main unit into the mounting hole in the panel.
2. Mount the previously rewired terminal unit to the main unit.
3. Push the adapter from the terminal unit side until it comes into
contact with the panel to temporarily secure the unit, and then
tighten the two fastening screws on the adapter. Alternately tighten
the two screws little by little to maintain a balance. Tighten the
screws to a torque of 0.29 to 0.39 N·m.
4. On the wired terminal unit, remove the connector cover on the side
to use for connection to another terminal unit, and then connect
the units together.
5. Insert the main unit into the mounting hole in the panel, and then
mount the terminal unit.
6. Push the adapter from the terminal unit side until it comes into
contact with the panel to temporarily secure the unit, and then
tighten the two fastening screws on the adapter. Alternately tighten
the two screws little by little to maintain a balance. Tighten the
screws to a torque of 0.29 to 0.39 N·m.
Removing from the Mounting Panel
1. Remove the Adapter attached to the Main Unit.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Adapter
Mounting panel
Adapter
(3)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Adapter
Adapter
(6)
(6)
(1)
(1)
Adapter
Adapter
E5@C/E5@C-T
129
2. Remove the Main Unit from the Terminal Unit.
3. Remove the Terminal Units.
Removing the Connector Cover
E5DC-B
1. For both male and female covers, insert the tip of a flat-blade
screwdriver into the cutout on the connector cover to remove the
connector cover.
Attaching the Connector Cover
E5DC-B
For male connector covers
1. Press on the connector cover until it clicks into place. There is no
vertical direction for male connector covers.
For female connector covers
1. Insert the projecting part on the female connector cover into the
groove on the terminal unit.
2. Press on the female connector cover until it clicks into place in the
cutout.
Mounting the DIN Track
Attach the DIN Track to the inside of the control panel with screws to
at least three locations.
• DIN Track (sold separately)
PFP-50N (50 cm) and PFP-100N (100 cm)
Install the DIN Track vertically to the ground.
(2)
(3)
Cutout
Male connector cover
Cutout
Female connector cover
(1)
Projection Part
Groove
(1)
Cutout
(2)
Vertical: OK Horizontal: NG
E5@C/E5@C-T
130
Mounting the Terminal Cover
E5CC/E5CC-T
Slightly bend the E53-COV23 Terminal Cover to attach it to the
terminal block as shown in the following diagram. The Terminal Cover
cannot be attached in the opposite direction. E53-COV17 Terminal
Cover can be also attached.
Make sure that the "UP" mark is facing up, and then attach the E53-
COV17 Terminal Cover to the holes on the top and bottom of the
Digital Temperature Controller.
E5EC/E5AC/E5EC-T/E5AC-T
Slightly bend the E53-COV24 Terminal Cover to attach it to the
terminal block as shown in the following diagram. The Terminal Cover
cannot be attached in the opposite direction.
Attaching the End Cover
E5DC/E5DC-B
1. Install the E5DC/E5DC-B in a panel.
2. Peel off the release paper from the double-sided tape on the End
Cover.
3. Align the tabs on the End Cover with the depressions on the
E5DC/E5DC-B and attach the End Cover.
4. Secure the End Cover so that the double-sided tape is firmly
attached.
Adapter
Terminal Cover
(E53-COV17)
(Sold separately)
E53-COV17 E53-COV23
Enlarged illustration of
Terminal Section
Enlarged illustration of the terminal part
Slightly bend the
E53-COV24 Terminal
Cover in the direction
shown by the arrows to
attach it to the terminal block.
Double-sided tape
E5@C/E5@C-T
131
Removing the Digital Temperature Controller from the case
E5GC
You can use the Y92F-55 Draw-out Jig to remove the interior body of
the Digital Temperature Controller from the case to perform
maintenance without removing the terminal wiring. This is possible
only for the E5GC. Check the specifications of the case and Digital
Temperature Controller before removing the Digital Temperature
Controller from the case.
1. Draw out the interior body from the rear case.
1. Slowly insert the Draw-out Jig into the Draw-out Jig insertion holes
laterally until it clicks into place. (There is a hole at both the top and
bottom.) (If you attempt to draw out the interior body of the Digital
Controller when only one hook is engaged, the Digital Controller
may be damaged.)
2. Pull out the Draw-out Jig together with the front panel. Do not pull
with excessive force. Slowly pull out the Digital Controller laterally.
(If you pull the interior body out at an angle, the Digital Controller
may be damaged.)
3. After the interior body is free from the rear case, support the
interior body with one hand and draw it out slowly in a horizontal
direction.
2. Insert the new interior body into the rear case.
1. When inserting the interior body back into the rear case, make
sure the PCBs are parallel to each other, mount the sealing
rubber, and press the interior body toward the rear case and into
position, making sure that the sealing rubber does not move.
2. When you press the Digital Controller into position, press down on
the rear case hooks so that the case hooks securely lock in place.
(There are rear case hooks at both the top and bottom of the rear
case.) If the Digital Controller is not correctly mounted into the rear
case, the rear case may not be waterproof. When inserting the
Digital Controller, do not allow the electronic components to touch
the rear case.
Removing the draw-out jig when only one hook is caught
in the draw-out jig insertion hole
1. Pull the Draw-out Jig slowly in the direction shown in the figure.
(This step is the same even if the other hook is caught.)
2. Confirm that the Draw-out jig is free of the Draw-out jig insertion
hole.
3. If the interior body separates from the rear case, slowly press the
interior body into the rear case in a horizontal direction.
If you do not follow the procedures above, the Digital Controller
may be damaged.
Precautions when Wiring
• Separate input leads and power lines in order to prevent external
noise.
• Use crimp terminals when wiring the screw terminal blocks.
• Use the suitable wiring material and crimp tools for crimp terminals.
• Tighten the terminal screws to a torque of 0.43 to 0.58 N·m.
The specified torque is 0.5 N·m for the E5CC-U.
E5CC/E5EC/E5AC/E5DC/E5@C-T/E5GC
(Controllers with Screw Terminal Blocks) and
E5CC-U (Plug-in model)
Wire Size
Use the wire sizes and stripping lengths given in the following table.
• If you use crimp terminals, use the stripping length that is
recommended by the manufacturer of the crimp terminals.
• To reduce the affects of noise, use shielded twisted-pair cable for
the signal lines.
(1)
(1)(2)
Draw-out Jig insertion holes
Rear case
Draw-out Jig
Front panel
Draw-out Jig insertion holes
Hook
Top View
PCBs
(1)
Sealing rubber position
Case hooks
Rear case hooks
Rear case hooks
(2)
(2)
* Make sure that the top and bottom PCBs are parallel to each other and
insert them into the rear case.
Model Wire Size Stripping length
E5CC/E5EC/E5AC/
E5DC/E5GC
(Controllers with
Screw Terminal
Blocks) / E5@C-T
AWG24 to AWG18
(0.21 to 0.82 mm2)
6 to 8 mm
(without crimp
terminals)
E5CC-U AWG24 to AWG14
(0.21 to 2.08 mm2)
5 to 6 mm
(without crimp
terminals)
(1)
(2)
(3)
E5@C/E5@C-T
132
Crimp Terminal
For the E5CC/E5EC/E5AC/E5DC/E5GC (Controllers with Screw
Terminal Blocks) or E5@C-T, use the following types of crimp
terminals for M3 screws.
Although you can connect two crimp terminals with insulation sleeves
to one terminal, you cannot do so if the diameter of the insulation
sleeves is too large.
Select a crimp terminal that can be tightened as shown below.
(Excluding the E5CC-U)
Some terminal blocks have a large crimp part. In this case, bend the
terminal in advance as shown in the figure, and tighten slowly to
ensure that the terminal screw is vertical to the terminal surface of the
terminal block.
For the E5CC-U, use the following types of crimp terminals for M3.5
screws.
• If you use crimp terminals for the E5DC, use crimp terminals with
insulation sleeves. If you use a bare crimp terminal with no
insulation, the terminal may short with the terminal above or below
it. If you use bare crimp terminals, cover the crimped sections with
insulating marking tubes. Secure the marking tubes so that they do
not move.
Recommended Crimp Terminals with Insulation Sleeves for the E5DC
E5GC (Controllers with Screwless Clamp
Terminal Blocks)
1. Connection Method for Screwless Clamp Terminals
The same method is used to connect stranded wires, solid wires, and
ferrules.
Part Names of the Terminal Block
Connection Method
1. Press the pusher with a flat-blade screwdriver.
2. With the screwdriver still pressing the pusher, insert the wire into
the terminal (Insertion) hole.
3. Remove the flat-blade screwdriver from the pusher.
Checking Connections
• After insertion, pull gently on the wire to make sure that it will not
come out (i.e., to confirm that it is held by the terminal block).
2. Removal Method for Screwless Clamp Terminals
The same method is used to remove stranded wires, solid wires, and
ferrules.
1. Press the pusher with a flat-blade screwdriver.
2. With the screwdriver still pressing the pusher, pull the wire out of
the terminal (Insertion) hole.
3. Remove the flat-blade screwdriver from the pusher.
Manufacturer Model number
J.S.T. Mfg. Co. V1.25-B3A
V0.5-3A
5.8 mm max.
5.8 mm max.
E5CC, E5EC, E5AC, or E5@C-T
Note: Be careful in the tightening
direction, as the terminal block
is at an angle.
E5GC or E5DC
7.2 mm max.
7.2 mm max.
NA
OK
Pusher
Terminal (Insertion) hole
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1)
(2)
(3)
E5@C/E5@C-T
133
3. Recommended Wire Size and Ferrules
Wire Size
Use the wire sizes and stripping lengths given in the following table.
Ferrules
Ferrules must be 0.8 to 1.4 mm in diameter.
The exposed conductor inserted into the terminal must be 8 to 12 mm
in length.
Recommended ferrules
E5@C-B (Controllers with Push-In Plus Terminal
Blocks)
1. Connecting Wires to the Push-In Plus Terminal Block
Part Names of the Terminal Block
Connecting Wires with Ferrules and Solid Wires
Insert the solid wire or ferrule straight into the terminal block until the
end touches the terminal block.
If a wire is difficult to connect because it is too thin, use a flat-blade
screwdriver in the same way as when connecting stranded wire.
Connecting Stranded Wires
Use the following procedure to connect the wires to the terminal block.
1. Hold a flat-blade screwdriver at an angle and insert it into the
release hole. The angle should be between 10° and 15°.
If the flat-blade screwdriver is inserted correctly, you will feel the
spring in the release hole.
2. With the flat-blade screwdriver still inserted into the release hole,
insert the wire into the terminal hole until it strikes the terminal
block.
3. Remove the flat-blade screwdriver from the release hole.
Checking Connections
• After the insertion, pull gently on the wire to make sure that it will
not come off and the wire is securely fastened to the terminal block.
• To prevent short circuits, insert stripped part of a stranded or solid
wire or the conductor part of a ferrule until it is hidden inside the
terminal insertion hole. (See the following diagram.)
Wire Size Stripping length
AWG24 to AWG18
(0.21 to 0.82 mm2)8 to 12 mm
Manufacturer name Model number
Altech Corp. 2623.0
Daido Solderless Terminal Mfg. Co. AVA-0.5
J.S.T. Mfg. Co. TUB-0.5
Nichifu Co., Ltd.
Single (1 wire)
TGNTC-1.25-9T
TGVTC-1.25-11T
TGNTC-1.25-11T
TC0.3-9.5
TC1.25-11S-ST
TC1.25-11S
TC2-11S
Double (2 wires) TGWVTC-1.25-9T
TGWVTC-1.25-11T
0.8 to 1.4mm
8 to 12mm
Release hole
Terminal
(Insertion) hole
E5CC-B/EC-B
E5DC-B
Release hole
Terminal
(Insertion) hole
Ferrules and
Solid Wires
E5CC-B/EC-B
If a wire is difficult to
connect because it is
too thin, use a
flat-blade screwdriver
in the same way as
when connecting
stranded wire.
E5DC-B
Ferrules and
Solid Wires
Flat-blade screwdriver
10 to 15°
(1)
(2)
(3)
E5CC-B/EC-B
∗
Side view
of the product
30°
∗Side view of the product
E5DC-B
(1)
(2)
(3)
Flat-blade
screwdriver
10 to 15°
E5@C/E5@C-T
134
2. Removing Wires from the Push-In Plus Terminal Block
Use the following procedure to remove wires from the terminal block.
The same method is used to remove stranded wires, solid wires, and
ferrules.
1. Hold a flat-blade screwdriver at an angle and insert it into the
release hole.
2. With the flat-blade screwdriver still inserted into the release hole,
remove the wire from the terminal insertion hole.
3. Remove the flat-blade screwdriver from the release hole.
3. Recommended Ferrules and Crimp Tools
Recommended ferrules
Note: 1. Make sure that the outer diameter of the wire coating is
smaller than the inner diameter of the insulation sleeve of
the recommended ferrule.
2. Make sure that the ferrule processing dimensions conform
to the following figures.
Recommended Flat-blade Screwdriver
Use a flat-blade screwdriver to connect and remove wires.
Use the following flat-blade screwdriver.
The following table shows manufacturers and models as of 2015/Dec.
*OMRON's exclusive purchase model XW4Z-00B is available to
order as SZF 0-0,4 x 2,5 (manufactured by Phoenix Contact).
Applicable wire Ferrule
Con-
ductor
length
(mm)
Recommended ferrules
mm2AWG
Manufactured
by Phoenix
Contact
Manufactured
by
Weidmuller
Manufactured
by
Wago
0.25 24 8 AI0.25-8
H0.25/12 FE-0.25-8N-YE
0.34 22 8 AI0.34-8
H0.34/12 FE-0.34-8N-TQ
0.5 20 8 AI0.5-8 H0.5/14
FE-0.5-8N-WH
0.75 18 8 AI0.75-8
H0.75/14 FE-0.75-8N-GY
1 18 8 AI1-8 H1.0/14
FE-1.0-8N-RD
1.5 16 8 AI1.5-8 H1.5/14
FE-1.5-8N-BK
Recommended crimp tool
CRIMPFOX6
CRIMPFOX6T-F
CRIMPFOX10S
PZ6 roto
Variocrimp4
10 to 15°
Flat-blade screwdriver
(1)(2)
(3)
E5CC-B/EC-B
∗
Side view
of the product
∗Side view of the product
Flat-blade
screwdriver
E5DC-B
(1)
(2)
(3)
10 to 15°
30°
2.1 mm max. 2.7 mm max.
8 mm
Model Manufacturer
ESD 0,40✕2,5 Wera
SZS 0,4✕2,5
SZF 0-0,4✕2,5 *Phoenix Contact
0.4✕2.5✕75 302 Wiha
AEF.2,5✕75 Facom
210-719 Wago
SDIS 0.4✕2.5✕75 Weidmuller
9900 (-2.5✕75) Vessel
FrontSide
0.4 mm
2.5 mm dia.
2.5 mm
E5@C/E5@C-T
135
Three-year Guarantee
Period of Guarantee
The guarantee period of the Unit is three years starting from the date
the Unit is shipped from the factory.
Scope of Guarantee
The Unit is guaranteed under the following operating conditions.
1. Average Operating Temperature
(see note): −10°C to 50°C
2. Mounting Method: Standard mounting
(Mounted to panel or DIN Track.)
Example: Mounted to Panel
Note: Average Operating Temperature
Refer to the process temperature of the Unit mounted to a
control panel and connected to peripheral devices on condition
that the Unit is in stable operation, sensor input type K is
selected for the Unit, the positive and negative thermocouple
input terminals of the Unit are short-circuited, and the ambient
temperature is stable.
Should the Unit malfunction during the guarantee period, OMRON
shall repair the Unit or replace any parts of the Unit at the expense of
OMRON.
Top
Bottom
MEMO
136
Terms and Conditions Agreement
Read and understand this catalog.
Please read and understand this catalog before purchasing the products. Please consult your OMRON representative if you have
any questions or comments.
Warranties.
(a) Exclusive Warranty. Omron’s exclusive warranty is that the Products will be free from defects in materials and workmanship
for a period of twelve months from the date of sale by Omron (or such other period expressed in writing
by Omron). Omron disclaims all other warranties, express or implied.
(b) Limitations. OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ABOUT
NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE
PRODUCTS. BUYER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL
SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE.
Omron further disclaims all warranties and responsibility of any type for claims or expenses based on infringement by the Products
or otherwise of any intellectual property right. (c) Buyer Remedy. Omron’s sole obligation hereunder shall be, at Omron’s election,
to (i) replace (in the form originally shipped with Buyer responsible for labor charges for removal or replacement thereof) the
non-complying Product, (ii) repair the non-complying Product, or (iii) repay or credit Buyer an amount equal to the purchase price
of the non-complying Product; provided that in no event shall Omron be responsible for warranty, repair, indemnity or any other
claims or expenses regarding the Products unless Omron’s analysis confirms that the Products were properly handled, stored,
installed and maintained and not subject to contamination, abuse, misuse or inappropriate modification. Return of any Products by
Buyer must be approved in writing by Omron before shipment. Omron Companies shall not be liable for the suitability or
unsuitability or the results from the use of Products in combination with any electrical or electronic components, circuits, system
assemblies or any other materials or substances or environments. Any advice, recommendations or information given orally or in
writing, are not to be construed as an amendment or addition to the above warranty.
See http://www.omron.com/global/ or contact your Omron representative for published information.
Limitation on Liability; Etc.
OMRON COMPANIES SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
LOSS OF PROFITS OR PRODUCTION OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS,
WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY.
Further, in no event shall liability of Omron Companies exceed the individual price of the Product on which liability is asserted.
Suitability of Use.
Omron Companies shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes or regulations which apply to the
combination of the Product in the Buyer’s application or use of the Product. At Buyer’s request, Omron will provide applicable
third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use which apply to the Product. This information by itself
is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the Product in combination with the end product, machine,
system, or other application or use. Buyer shall be solely responsible for determining appropriateness of the particular Product
with respect to Buyer’s application, product or system. Buyer shall take application responsibility in all cases.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCT FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY OR IN LARGE
QUANTITIES WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS,
AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCT(S) IS PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE
OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.
Programmable Products.
Omron Companies shall not be responsible for the user’s programming of a programmable Product, or any consequence
thereof.
Performance Data.
Data presented in Omron Company websites, catalogs and other materials is provided as a guide for the user in determining
suitability and does not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of Omron’s test conditions, and the user must correlate it
to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the Omron’s Warranty and Limitations of Liability.
Change in Specifications.
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons. It is our practice
to change part numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when significant construction changes are made.
However, some specifications of the Product may be changed without any notice. When in doubt, special part numbers may be
assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application. Please consult with your Omron’s representative at any time to
confirm actual specifications of purchased Product.
Errors and Omissions.
Information presented by Omron Companies has been checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no responsibility is
assumed for clerical, typographical or proofreading errors or omissions.
Authorized Distributor:
In the interest of product improvement,
specifications are subject to change without notice.
OMRON Corporation Industrial Automation Company
OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC
2895 Greenspoint Parkway, Suite 200
Hoffman Estates, IL 60169 U.S.A.
Tel: (1) 847-843-7900/Fax: (1) 847-843-7787
Regional Headquarters
OMRON EUROPE B.V.
Wegalaan 67-69, 2132 JD Hoofddorp
The Netherlands
Tel: (31)2356-81-300/Fax: (31)2356-81-388
Contact: www.ia.omron.com
Kyoto, JAPAN
OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD.
No. 438A Alexandra Road # 05-05/08 (Lobby 2),
Alexandra Technopark,
Singapore 119967
Tel: (65) 6835-3011/Fax: (65) 6835-2711
OMRON (CHINA) CO., LTD.
Room 2211, Bank of China Tower,
200 Yin Cheng Zhong Road,
PuDong New Area, Shanghai, 200120, China
Tel: (86) 21-5037-2222/Fax: (86) 21-5037-2200 Cat. No. H177-E1-12 0319 (1111)
© OMRON Corporation 2011-2019 All Rights Reserved.
CSM_14_11_0619
